下面小编给大家整理的高二英语单元作文（共含23篇），希望大家喜欢!同时，但愿您也能像本文投稿人“银古”一样，积极向本站投稿分享好文章。
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit4.4.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第四单元
关键词 内容
一、教学建议：
1.教学目的与方式
当我们捧着一期新到手的报纸并惬意地享受它所带给我们的众多新闻与信息时，我们是否曾为它如何诞生的而感兴趣呢？文本意在告诉读者一些有关报刊行业的常识性知识，了解报纸作为人们日常生活中一种不可替代的消费品从采访、初稿、编辑、审定直到最后排版校样的一系列工作中，工作人员所付出辛勤劳动，言简意赅，生动形象。对扩大学生的知识面，了解实际生活都有好处。同时，对中国日报(CHINA DAILY)作为较为详尽的介绍，还将有助于提高学生们的英语学习兴趣。
在教学中通过使用整体教学、分层次训练的方式，使学生系统深入的掌握本单元教学内容，能够用英语进行日常约会，掌握-ing形式作主语和宾语的用法。达到活学活用的目的，实现英语教学中的素质教育。
能力目标：
1.对话(Lesson 13)
a.朗读：语音语调准确，情感适度；
b.归纳：学习怎样用英语进行日常约会；
Making an appointment(日常约会)
Will you be / Are you free this evening? Yes,I'll be free.
Are you going to see the new film? Yes,I'd like to.
Let's go together then,shall we? Ok.
What time shall we meet? I suggest 7 o'clock.
Where is the best place to meet? What about meeting outside the theatre?
Sounds good idea. See you. See you then.
c.运用：套用句型模拟对话；
d.创造：自编对话并表演；
e.写作：复述并将对话改写成短文。
2.课文(Lesson14、15)
a.理解课文大意，能回答有关问题（Wb.P89 Exercise 1）；
b.归纳大意，能复述课文；
c.将课文改写成100词左右的短文；
d.以简图的形式对报纸的出版过程进行详细的说明。
2.教学重点
单词：
journalist, event, cover, fix, face-to-face, interview, photographer, editor, save, headline, check, develop, deliver, rail, daily, cost, everyday.
词组：
get down to work, fix a time for, work on, type……into computer, hand sth. to sb., be popular with, as well, care for, take a photograph (of), look up.
通过设置丰富的语言环境，向学生呈现重点词汇。可通过问答，句型转换，补全句子等方法。
例1：What's on this weekend at the People's Theatre?
“The Red Roses” are giving a performance.
例2：If you want to get a job in the company, you may have a face-to-face interview with the manager.
例3：As a teacher of English, she is liked by her students.
As a teacher of English, she ____ ____ ____ her students.(is popular with)
例4：Final examination is coming, and you should begin to prepare it.
Final examination is coming, and you should ____ ____ ____ ____ it.(get down to preparing)
例5：It is said that the performances are very good.
People ____ ____ ____ ____ are very good.
The performances ____ ____ ____ ____ very good.(say that the performances);(are said to be)
以下句子供教学参考：
1、The most important event of this year is that Macao will return to China in December.
今年最重大的事件是十二月份澳门将回归中国。
2、Which events have you entered for?
你参加了几项比赛？
3、They sent the best reporters to cover the conference.
他们派出了最好的记者去报道大会的消息。
4、Cover the table with a cloth.
在桌子上铺上台布。
5、By sunset we had covered thirty miles.
到日落的时候，我们已经走了三十英里。
6、His research covers a wide field.
他的研究工作涉及的范围很广。
7、Is that word covered in the dictionary?
这部词典里有那个词吗？
8、They have fixed the date for the wedding.
他们已经定了婚礼日期。
9、My watch has stopped.It needs fixing.
我的表停了，需要修理。
10.Her eyes were fixed on the gun.
她紧盯那只枪。
11.He is fixing his thought on what he is doing.
他正在全神贯注地工作。
12.He had a shelf fixed to the wall.
他找人把架子安在了墙上。
13.It will save time if we drive the car instead of walking.
我们如果以车代步的话，可以节省时间。
14.It will save me 50p if I buy the smaller box.
我买小箱子可以节省五十便士。
15.He is saving to buy the computer.
为了买计算机，他在节省开支。
16.The doctor saved the child's life.
医生救了那个孩子的命。
17.The man saved the child from drowning.
那个人救了那个孩子使他免于溺水而死。
18.We are saving for a new car.
我们现在正在储蓄，准备买一量新车。
19.We delivered your order to your door.
我们送货上门。
20.Did you deliver my message to my father?
你把我的信息传给我父亲了吗？
21.He delivered his speech effectively.
他演讲说得非常有力。
22.We must help to deliver them from misery and suffering.
我们必须帮助他们脱离苦难。
23.It's time to get down to some business.
现在该认真干些事情了。
24.Let's fix a time for meeting.
让我们约个时间见面。
25.He sat up far into the night, working on the report.
他熬夜写报告。
26.We had a face-to-face argument with them.
我们同他们进行了一次面对面的辩论。
27.They are standing there, face to face.
他们面对面地站在那里。
28.Please type the article into the computer.
请把这篇文章输入电脑。
29.Please hand the book on the desk to me.
请把桌子上的书递给我。
30.Hand in your examination papers now, please.
请把试卷交上来。
31.The teacher handed out the books at the beginning of the lesson.
老师刚上课的时候，把书发给了学生。
32.His new book is very popular with readers.
他的新书很受读者欢迎。
33.I'm going to London and my sister's coming as well.
我要去伦敦，我妹妹也随我一起去。
34.I realy care for the students in my class.
我真的喜欢我班上的学生。
35.She cared for her father in his dying years.
他在父亲生命垂危的数年里一直照料他。
36.Would you care for some tea?
要不要来点茶。
37.He wants to take a photograph of the Great Hall of the People.
他想拍一张人民大会堂的照片。
38.Look up the time of the next train in the timetable.
查一下火车时刻表中下一趟车的时间。
3.教学重点：动名词作主语，宾语的用法。
动名词作主语：
1）Seeing is believing.
眼见为实。
2）Playing football is his favourite sport.
踢足球是他最喜欢的运动。
句型1：
It is +名词（或形容词）+动名词
No use
It is no good doing that.
A waste of time
So nice / interesting / foolish……
It's a waste of time waiting here.
在这里等是浪费时间。
It'sso nice talking to you.
很高兴和你谈话。
句型2：
There is no + 动名词
如：There is no joking about such matter.这事开不得玩笑。
动名词作宾语：
只能跟动名词作宾语的动词
Group I: admit, appreciate, avoid, celebrate, consider, delay, deny, dislike, enjoy,
excuse, explain, finish, forgive, imagine, keep, mention, mind, miss, practise,
prevent,risk, suggest, understand……
GroupII: need, want, require
GroupIII: permit, allow, forbid, require
*Group II: need, want, require 三个词后面跟的动名词必须是主动形式。同时，其动名词不能随意扩大。例如：
（1）This house needs cleaning.这房间该打扫一下。
（2）That car wants repairing.那车需要修理了。（但不能说：I want resting.我需要休息。）
*Group III: 第三组词跟人作宾语后，必须用不定式作补语。例如：
This room won't allow smoking.在这间屋里不准吸烟。
We do not allow anybody to smoke here.这里不许吸烟。
例句：
（1）We enjoy dancing like you do.我们和你一样也喜欢跳舞。
（2）Would you mind opening the window?打开窗子你介意吗？
一些特殊动词后面接不定式和动名词，其含义不同。
(1)
remember +动名词 表示动作已经完成
forget +不定式 表示动作尚未发生
I remember locking the door. 我记得把门锁上了。
You must remember to lock the door.你一定要记住锁好门。
I'll never forget seeing the Alps for the first time.我永远不会忘记第一次看见阿尔卑斯山的景。
I'm afraid he will forget to write to me.恐怕他会忘记给我写信。
(2)
+动名词 表示停止做某事
+不定式 表示停下来，开始做某事
The man stopped working and began to have a rest.那人停下手里的活，开始休息。
The man who was talking stopped to work.正在说话的那人停下来开始工作。
(3)
+动名词 表示学习某事/物
+不定式 表示学会了某事/物
Having learned to skate, she began to learn swimming.
学会了滑冰，她又开始学游泳。
(4)
+动名词 表示继续做同一件事
+不定式 表示继续做另一件事（动作不变内容/方式变）
He went on reading the story.他继续读那篇故事。
He went on to read another story.他继续读另一篇故事。
(5)
+动名词 表示实验
+不定式 表示尽量：企图
I tried cooking the meat in wine.我试着用酒煮肉。
Try to get here early.尽量早点到这里。
(6)
+动名词 表示害怕做某事的后果（不具体）
+不定式 表示害怕而不敢去做（具体）
He is afraid of falling.他害怕会摔倒。
He was afraid to go there alone, so he remained.他不敢独自去，于是就留下了。
(7)
+动名词 表示意味着
+不定式 表示打算，意欲
This will mean giving you some trouble.这意味着给你添麻烦。
I don't mean to trouble you.我并没想给你添麻烦。
(8)
prefer一词较特殊，其结构如下：
Prefer A to B
Prefer to do A rather than do B
Prefer doing A to doing B.
(=would rather do A than do B)
例句：
1)I prefer to stay in a house rather than stay in a hotel.我宁愿住在一所房子里也不愿住宾馆。
3)She prefers listening to music to playing the piano.她宁愿听音乐也不愿去弹钢琴。
(9)
+动名词 表示情不自禁
+不定式 表示不能帮忙（某事）
Hearing the news, she can't help laughing.
听到那消息，她情不自禁地笑了。
At that time I was very busy,so I can't help(to) repair your bike.
那时我太忙，所以没法帮你修理自行车。
2）后面用不定式和动名词，其含义不变的动词有：begin / start / continue
They began working / to work soon after they arrived.
他们刚一到就开始工作。
3）like, hate, love, prefer 等动词既可以接不定式，又可接动名词，意思相同。单表示一个特定的具体动作时，接不定式。
Children like / love to see cartoons.=Children like / love seeing cartoons.
孩子们喜欢看动画片。
--Can I give you a Life?
--No,thanks. I prefer to walk back, for it is not far.
你要搭车吗？
不，谢谢。我喜欢走着回去，不远。
二、学法指导：
1、谈谈怎样做好完形填空
完形填空（Cloze Test）是外语学习中一种综合练习或测试形式。这种题目提供一篇短文，把文中的若干词语抽出，留出空白，要求学生根据全文的意思，把正确的词语填入空白处。完形填空是一项考查学生综合运用所学词汇，语法知识能力和阅读理解能力的重要题型。同学们普遍认为，这种题很难。但是，如果你掌握了做完形填空的基本规律，正确运用已掌握的词汇，语法知识，完全可以取得较为满意的成绩。
1）完形填空的解题要点
（1）从整体入手
首先通读全文，抓住文章中人和事物的特点及情节发展的大致方向，把握住文章的中心思想。如果在阅读中遇到难点，暂且把它放下，继续读下去，直至读完全文，掌握文章大意。
（2）注意逻辑上、形式上一致
注意全文与局部在逻辑上、形式上一致，局部意思符合整体意思，上下文在形式上一致。
（3）采用推理法或排除法
解题时要采用推理法，根据已知信息推未知信息；还要采用排除法，根据已掌握的知识，排除错误的答案，选择正确的答案。
2）完形填空的解题步骤
（1）通读全文，掌握大意
首先要把全文通读一遍，了解大意。在阅读过程中，可以借助短文下面的备选答案来帮助理解。如果对文章的主要意思还不清楚，宁可再看一两遍，也不要急于填空。切忌看一句填一句。
（2）逐句阅读，选出答案
在通读全文，了解大意的基础上，再逐句阅读，选出答案。在选择答案时，可以采用“排除法”。要特别注意文章的第一个句子。一般来说，第一句都不留空，是完整的句子。借助于这个句子可以大体了解到文章的体裁内容和文体特点，以便作到心中有数。
（3）复读全文，检查答案
全部填完后，把短文重读一遍，要重意义和语言知识两方面进行检查。发现错误，加以纠正。
2、本单元句型
（1）What's on this weekend?
周末上演什么？
What's on +时间/地点，表示“在……时间/地点上演什么”，其中on是副词，作表语，意为“上演”，“演出”。
What's on tonight?
今晚上演什么？
What's on at Guanglu Cinema?
光陆电影院上演什么电影？
（2）They are said to be very good.
据他们说都很棒。
本句用了“sb. is / was said +不定式”的句型。它还可以转化为下面两个句型：
i It is / was said + that 从句
ii They / people say +that 从句
所以本句还可以改成：
It is said that they are very good.
People say that they are very good.
[注]可用于上述句型的动词除say外，还有report, hope, believe, suppose等。
（3）There is no more time left for adding new stories ……
没有时间来增加新的报道了。
There is (no) …… left for sth. / doing sth. 的意思是“还留下（没留下）……来干某事。”
There is some time left for singing a song.
还剩下一点时间来唱支歌。
There is a little money left for buying the books.
还剩下一点钱来买书。
There is no space left for putting the writing-desk.
没有放写字台的地方了。
（4）China Daily has plenty of advertisements, which help to cut the costs of making the newspaper.
《中国日报》刊登大量广告这有助于降低报纸的生产成本。
1.China Daily 是专有名词需要大写。
2.plenty of只用于肯定句，后面可接可数名词和不可数名词。
You have plenty of time to do the work.
你有足够的时间来做这工作。
There are plenty of men out of work.
有大量的人失业。
3.Which 引导的是非限制性定语从句。
My new car, which I paid several thousand pounds for, is not running well.
我花几千英镑买的新车运行状况不好。
4.cut 这里是“削减”的意思。
His salary has been cut by ten per cent.
他的薪水减少了百分之十。
3、疑难解析
例1：The public library and the school stand across the street.
A.face-to-face B.faced-to-faced
C.face to face D.A or C
选择：C
解析：
face-to-face带连字符的合成词在句子中作定语，而face to face不带连字符则在句中作状语。例如：After a face-to-face interview, he got the job.在一次面试后他得到了那份工作。In the carriage they sat face to face.在火车车厢里他们面对面地坐着。类似的结构：heart-to-heart贴心的back-to-back背靠背的hand-in-hand手拉手的shoulder-to-shoulder肩并肩的。
例2：He also learned to messages the 8th Route Army.
A.deliver; for B.delivering; to
C.deliver; from D.delivers; to
选择：A
解析：
deliver: take (letters, parcels,goods, message, etc)to the place or people they addressed to 递送；传送
短语：deliver + 名/代 + to
We delivered your order to your door.
我们送货上门。
另外，deliver: to say; read aloud 发言；发表
deliver + 名/代
After he came into power, the President delivered a wonderful speech.
总统上台之后，发表了一篇精彩的演说。
三、评价：
同步练习：
完成对话：
Jim: It's very kind of you to come and see me off.
Bob:My pleasure. 1
Jim: Thank you, and please say good-bye to all my friends in the college for me.
Bob:Ok.You can leave that to me.
Jim: 2 How can I thank you enough?
Bob:You're welcome. 3 I hope you'll come again.
Jim: Yes.I'll try my best to come back again and to see my friends here.
Bob: 4 .
Jim: 2:45, they say.
Bob: 5 .We'd better say good-bye now.
Jim: See you.
A.There is only a quarter to go
B.When will you get home?
C.I wish you had a good time during your stay here.
D.You have given me so much help during my stay here.
E.What time is your flight taking off?
F.I wish you a pleasant journey home.
G.I've been happy go do what I could.
单项选择：
6.“Can I have a look at your new car?”“Certainly, .”
A.please look B.it's to dear
C.it's really beautiful D.go ahead
7.A wonderful concert will be at the theatre across our school.
A.acted B.shown
C.played D.given
8.How many pages have you so far?Can you return the book to me tomorrow?
A.looked B.seen
C.covered D.turned
9.--What reason do you have for doing so?
--
A.I was told so B.I was told to
C.I hoped to D.I'd like to
10.Jim is often seen to be made behind after school.
A.to stay B.stay
C.staying D.stayed
11.It's time for us to to some work. We ought to do something every day.
A.get on B.get up
C.get down D.get in
12.When I write something, I usually go to the library to the necessary facts.
A.look up B.look out
C.look down D.look on
13.China is very with many college students.
A.satisfied B.popular
C.pleased D.agreed
14.No date has been fixed their visit china.
A.for; to B./; to
C.for; / D.at; for
15.The professor you want to see is an important experiment now.
A.moving on B.working out
C.keeping on D.working on
语法专练：
16.It's no use with him
A.quarrelling B.to quarrel
C.of quarrelling D.being quarreled
17.My brother regretted a lecture given by professor Wu.
A.missing B.to miss
C.improvement D.improved
18.This sentence needs .
A.improve B.improving
C.improvement D.improved
19.It's a good habit to practise English aloud in the morning.
A.to read B.reading
C.in reading D.to be reading
20.She suggested for an outing next Sunday.
A.go B.to go
C.going D.gone
21.To catch up with my classmates means even harder from now on.
A.study B.to study
C.studying D.studied
22. is easier than doing.
A.To talk B.Talk
C.Talking D.Having talked
23.The student doesn't mind when he speaks English.
A.being laughed B.being laughed at
C.to be laughed D.laughing at
24.---What are you going to do this afternoon?
---I'm thinking of to visit my aunt.
A.go B.going
C.having gone D.me going
25. a reply, he decided to write again.
A.Not receiving B.Not having received
C.Receiving not D.having not received
完形填空：
When I was walking down the street the other day, I happened to notice a small brown wallet lying on the ground. I picked it up and opened it to see if I could 26 the owner's name.There was nothing inside it 27 some change and an old photograph-a picture of a 28 and a young girl about twelve years old, who 29 the woman's daughter. I put the photograph back and 30 the wallet to the police station, 31 I handed it to the desk sergeant. 32 I left, the sergeant took 33 my name and address in case the owner might want to write and thank me.
That evening I went to have 34 with my aunt and uncle. They also invited a young woman 35 there would be 36 people at the table. Her face was familiar. I was quite sure that we 37 before, but I could not 38 where I had seen her. While talking, however, the young woman 39 mention that she had lost her wallet that afternoon. 40 I realized where I had seen her. She was the young girl 41 the photograph, although she was now 42 .She was very 43 , of course, when I was able to 44 her wallet to her. Then I explained that I had 45 her from the photograph I 46 in the wallet. My uncle 47 going to the police station immediately to claim the 48 .As the police sergeant handed it over, he said that 49 was amazing that I 50 the wallet, but also the person who had lost it.
26.A.find out B.find C.discover D.look for
27.A.beside B.besides C.except D.except for
28.A.man B.woman C.boy D.young man
29.A.looked B.liked C.looked like D.as if
30.A.brought B.sent C.returned D.took
31.A.When B.which C.where D.then
32.A.Before B.When C.After D.While
33.A.up B.down C.with D.for
34.A.meal B.supper C.dinner D.tea
35.A.now that B.since C.as D.so that
36.A.four B.five C.three D.six
37.A.didn't meet B.had met C.had not met D.met
38.A.know B.remember C.see D.recognize
39.A.had to B.was to C.did D.happened to
40.A.All at once B.At once C.Right now D.Right away
41.A.for B.in C.to D.on
42.A.too old B.more older C.much older D.much elder
43.A.surprising B.excited C.exciting D.surprised
44.A.tell B.describe C.ask D.say
45.A.remembered B.known C.recognized D.seen
46.A.had found B.found C.saw D.had
47.A.insisted B.suggested C.insisted on D.advise
48.A.picture B.photograph C.woman D.wallet
49.A.it B.she C.that D.this
50.A.did find B.did not only find C.not only found D.had not only found
阅读理解：
NANJING(Xinhua)-Suicides(自杀)are on the increase in China, but anyone who feels like taking that route and who lives in Nanjing can now dial 632977 to talk about it.
China's first-ever-suicide-prevention centre opened on July 1st in the capital of East China's Jiangsu Province.
Professor Zhai Zhutao, head of the center, said about 10 per cent of the population suffer from psychological(心里上的)troubles of various kinds, and that suicides are on the rise.
The center offers telephone, mail(信件)and face-to-face advising services while spreading knowledge on how to prevent suicides among people and families.
CHINA DAILY
Friday, July 5, 1991
51.When did the centre open?
A.On July 1 every year
B.Three days before the news was published
C.On Children's Day
D.On the first Monday of July in 1991
52.What do we learn about the centre?
A.It sends telephones to those who try to suicide
B.It helps to stop suicide
C.It writes for those who have suicided
D.It often telephones those who live in Nanjing, advising them to prevent suicide
53.According to the news, .
A.a marked increase in suicide has happened in China.
B.Professor Zhai Zhutao founded the first suicide-prevention centre.
C.You'd better report to the centre on anyone's suicide.
D.Only Jiangsu Province has such a centre.
54.The centre's services will certainly work because .
A.it spreads knowledge of life-saving
B.one tenth of the people may suicide
C.many people are suffering
D.there must be some psychological explanation for suicides
单词拼写：
55.My father is on China Daily. He is a j .
56.Professor Wang went to Paris to attend an i conference.
57.I'm going to have a photo taken by the p .
58.Did you buy his l book published last month?
59.have you got your films d ?
60.The newly-opened Children's Palace is p with a lot of children.
短文改错：
When you visit London, one of the first thing you will see 61._____
is Big Ben, the famous clock which can be heard of all over 62._____
the world on the BBC.If the House of Parliament have not been 63._____
burned down in 1834, the great clock would never have built. 64._____
It is not only of a huge size, but is extremely accurate（准确的）as well. 65._____
Workers from Greenwich Observatory have the clock check twice a 66._____
day. On the BBC you can hear the clock when it is stroke because 67._____
microphones connected to the clock tower. Big Ben has rarely gone 68._____
wrong. Once , it fails to give the correct time. A painter who 69._____
had been working on the tower hang a pot of paint on one of 70._____
the hands and slowed it down.
参考答案：
1-5 FDGEA 6-10 DDCBA 11-15 CABAD 16-20 AABBC 21-25 CCBBB
26-30 ACBCD 31-35 CABCD 36-40 ABBDA 41-45 BCDBC 46-50 ACDAD
51-54 DBAC 55-60 journalist, international, photographer, latest, developed, propular.
61.thing-things 62.去掉of 63.have-had 64.have-have been
65.√ 66.check-checked 67.Stroke-striking 68.microphones-microphones are
69.fails-failed 70.hang-hung
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit13.doc
标题 unit13
章节 第十三单元
关键词 高二英语第十三单元
内容
一、教学目的和要求
⒈单词和词组
ruler L.49 四会
go on with the First World War wouldwide right(n.) L.50
peace
work out stick(vi.) stick to ruler L.51
course(n.) L.52
communist professor L.49 三会
scientific darkness shy content lead to discovery L.50
cheque human right
prove bent respect leading sadness take sides(in) L.51
fuel
advance advanced mathematics education L.52
further education technical
Albert Einstein Alexander Bell L.49 二会
the Nobel Prize bookmark L.50
Swiss Hitler Jew L.51
⒉日常交际用语：
Is it…? No, it’s not him/her Is he/she…?
Who is he/she? What did he do? It must be him/her
⒊语法：
学习名词性从句作语的用法。
二、重点与难点分析
Lesson 49
⒈I’m doing a word puzzle in this newspaper. 我正在猜报纸上的字谜。
puzzle意为“谜”，do a word puzzle or do a puzzle in words意为“猜字谜”。
这里的puzzle是名词，作“难题”，“难以解释的东西”讲。
例如：The murder case was a puzzle to the police. 这桩谋杀案对警察局来说是一个难题。
puzzle也可以作动词，意为“使人迷惑不解”。例如：
The murder case continued to puzzle the police.
这桩谋杀案仍使警察局迷惑不解。
⒉It must be him! 那肯定是他！
情态动词must主要指“肯定”和“禁止”，前者用于肯定句，表示推测，后者用于否定句，表示禁止。例如：
My father must be watching TV now.
我爸爸现在肯定在看电视。
She must be in the classroom.
她肯定在教室里。
You mustn’t smoke in public places.
公共场所禁止吸烟。
Lesson 50
⒈When he was a young boy he used to ask lots of questions…
他小时候常常问许多问题…
used to do sth. 意为“过去常常做某事”
be used to doing sth. 意为“习惯于做某事”
be used to do sth. 意为“被用来干什么”
例如：I used to drink coffee in the evening, but now I am used to drinking coffee in the morning.
过去我常常晚上喝咖啡，但是现在我习惯于早上喝咖啡。
Computers can be used to do a lot of work nowadays.
如今计算机可用来做许多事。
⒉By the time he was fourteen years old, he had learned maths all by himself.
到十四岁时，他已经自学了数学。
by与时间名词连用时表示“到某时为止”，“不迟于…(时间)”
当by后接将来时间时，句子时态用一般将来时或将来完成时；当by后接过去时间时，句子时态用过去完成时。当by后接现在时间时，句子时态用现在完成时。
例如：
My mother will be back by 5 o’clock this afternoon.
今天下点五点以前我妈妈就回来了。
We had learned English words by the end of last term.
到上学期期末为止，我们已经学了2000个英语单词。
By the end of this century, China will have become a more powerful and beautiful country in the world.
到本世纪末，中国将成为世界上更强大更美丽的国家。
By now, several bridges have been built over the Changjiang River.
到目前为止，长江上已经建了好几座桥。
⒊He found it hard to get along with the other boys.
他觉得很难与别的孩子相处。
在此句中，it为形容宾语，hard为宾语补足词，真正的宾语是不定式短语to get along with the other boys.
在一个含有复合宾语（即：宾语+宾补）的句子中，当宾语是不定式短语或从句时，由于不定式短语或从句较长，所以常使用it作形式宾语，而把真正的宾语置于句尾，以保持句子的平衡。例如：
I found it difficult to learn French well.
我觉得学好法语是很难的。
They kept it quiet that he was dead.
对于他的死他们保密。
⒋All through his life Einstein was content to spend most of this time alone, although he married twice and had lots of close friends.
虽然爱因斯坦结过两次婚，而且有很多亲密的朋友，但是在整个一生中，他还是愿意独自度过他的大部分时光。
content adj. 满足的；满意的；愿意的
be content with sth. 对…感到满意
be content to do sth. 愿意做某事
She is content with her present job.
她对目前的工作很满意。
I am always content with very little.
我总是很容易满足。
I shall be well content to do so.
我很愿意这样做。
⒌With the pay that he received and saved, he went on with his studies at university, where he received a doctor’s degree in 1905.
他用自己挣来和积存的钱继续读大学，19在大学获得博士学位。
⑴此句是复合句。其中包含两个定语从句。
a: that he received and saved修饰the pay
b: where he received a doctor’s degree in 1905是非限定性定语从句，修饰university.
⑵receive意为“收到”，accept意为“接受”，二者的语义有别。例如：
I received her invitation last week, but I didn’t accept it.
上星期我收到她的请柬，但是我没有接受。
⑶a doctor’s degree 博士学位
a master’s degree 硕士学位
a bachelor’s degree 学士学位
注意学位前的不定冠词
receive/win/get a doctor’s degree/a master’s degree/a bachelor’s degree意为获得博士/硕士/学士学位
Tom received a doctor’s degree in physics in Boston University last term.
上学期汤姆在波士顿大学获得物理学博士学位。
⒍…he began the research and studies which led to his new discoveries in physics.
…他开始了研究，这些研究使他在物理学方面有了新的发现。
⑴which led to his new discoveries in physics是限定性定语从句，修饰先行词组the research and studies
⑵lead to意为“引起”、“导致”、“造成”、“通向”
The car accident led to many deaths.
那次车祸使许多人丧生。
There is only one path leading to the forest.
只有一条小路通向森林。
Hard work and proper ways will lead you to success.
勤奋的工作和正确的方法会使你成功。
⒎In 1933 Einstein and his family left Europe for the USA.
1933年爱因斯坦和他的家人离开欧洲去美国。
leave for意为“动身到（某处）”介词“for”表示目标，去向。
My father left for Guangzhou two days ago.
我父亲两天前动身去广州了。
She left home for the railway station a few minutes ago.
几分钟前她离开家动身去火车站了。
⒏Einstein lived the rest of his life quietly in the USA.
爱因斯坦在美国安静地度过了他的余生。
⑴此句中的live是及物动词，常用于live…a life结构。意为“过着”（某种）生活。
例如：live a happy life 过着幸福的生活
live a hard life 过着艰苦的生活
live a miserable life 过着悲惨的生活
live a quiet life 过着宁静的生活
They are used to living a quiet life in the country.
他们习惯在农村过安静的生活。
The children in the city are living a happy life.
城里的孩子们过着幸福愉快的生活。
⑵句中的rest意为“其余的（部分或人），其他的（部分或人）”，使用时须与the连用。
Pick out the good apples and throw away the rest.
挑出好苹果，将其余的扔掉。
Some of the boys climbed the hill, the rest played games.
有些男孩爬山，其他的男孩做游戏。
⒐Besides his work in physics, he spent a lot of time working for human rights and progress.
除了在物理学方面的工作以外，他还花了大量的时间为人权和进步而工作。
注意besides和except的区别
besides意为“除了…之外（还有），有肯定和附加的含义”
except意为“除了…之外（不包括本身在内），有否定和排除的含义。”
例如：
Three girls went to the park besides Mary.
除了玛丽外，还有三个女孩去了公园。（玛丽去了公园，另外三个女孩也去了公园。）
All of us passed the maths exam besides Mike.
除了迈克外，我们大家也通过了数学考试。（迈克及格了，我们大家也及格了。）
All the girls went to the park except Mary.
除了玛丽外，其他女孩都去了公园。（玛丽没去公园。）
All of us passed the maths exam except Mike.
除迈克外，我们大家都通过了数学考试。（迈克没通过）
⒑It was said that he found in music the peace which was missing in a world full of wars and killlings.
据说他在音乐中找到了平静，这种平静在一个充满战争与杀戮的世界里是没有的。
⑴句中which was missing in a world full of wars and killings是限定性定语从句，修饰先行词the peace.
⑵full of意为“充满”。形容词短语full of…作定语，放在其所修饰的名词a world之后，a world full of wars and killings相当于a world which was full of wars and killings. 例如：
He brought us a basket full of vegetables. 他带给我们满满一蓝子蔬菜。
⒒Such was Albert Einstein, a simple man and the 20th century’s greatest scientist.
爱因斯坦就是这样一个人，一个质朴的人，一位二十世纪最伟大的科学家。
此句是倒装句。句中的such是代词，作“这”或“这些”讲。谓语动词根据情况用单数或复数。例如：
Such is my wish. 这就是我的愿望。
Such were his words. 这就是他讲的话。
Such is the answer to the question. 这就是问题的答案。
Lesson 51
⒈But Einstein stuck to his opinion and went on with his research.
但是爱因斯坦坚持自己的意见并继续研究。
⑴动词短语stick to意为“坚持（意见，看法等）”，其中to是介词，后跟名词或代词。例如：
No matter what you say, I will stick to my opinion.
不管你说什么，我会坚持我的观点。
I will stick to my work unitl it’s finished.
我会坚持干我的工作，直到完成它。
⑵stick(stuck, stuck)既可以作动词，也可以作名词。意为“贴，粘”，“卡住，陷在…里（无法移动）”、“手杖”例如：
The old woman can not walk without a walking stick.
这位老太太没有拐杖不能行走。
Don’t forget to stick a stamp on an envelope before you put it into the mail-box.
把信投进信箱前别忘了在信封上贴上邮票。
The car stuck in the mud.
汽车陷入泥里了。
The key has stuck in the lock.
钥匙卡在锁里了。
⒉From that time on Einstein was greatly respected as the leading scientist of the century.
从那时起，爱因斯坦备受尊敬，被公认为本世纪最杰出的科学家。
from that time on/from then on意为“从那时起”，常与过去时连用。
since that time/since then/ever since then意为“从那时起”，但与完成时连用。例如：
From then on he began to learn Russian.
从那时起，他开始学俄语。
Since then he has been writing poems.
从那时起，他一直在写诗。
⒊…as Switzerland did not take sides in the war. ……由于瑞士在大战中没有参加战争的任何一方。
take sides with sb./take the side of sb. 同意某人，支持某人，和…站在一边。例如：
Switzerland refused to take sides in world War II.
瑞士在第二次世界大战中拒绝参加任何一方。
He took sides with Mother against Father in the argument.
争论中他站在母亲一边反对父亲的意见。
⒋When Germany was ruled by Hitler in the early 1930s…….
二十世纪三十年代初期希特勒统治德国的时候……
in the early 1930s也可以写成in the early 1930’s二十世纪三十年代初期
in the middle 1990s 二十世纪九十年代中期
in the late 1990s 二十世纪九十年代末期
⒌Grammer：Noun Clauses as the Subject
语法：名词性从句：主语从句
用作主语的从句叫主语从句，它是名词性从句这一。引导主语从句的连接词有：连词that,whether；连接代词who,what和which；连接副词when,where,how,why等等。例如：
What he wanted to see was an end to all the armies of the world.
他所希望看到的是，全世界的一切军队全都消亡。
What he has done has nothing to do with us.
他所做的事情与我们无关。
That there is life on another planet is almost impossible.
在另一个星期上有生命几乎是不可能的。
Who killed the young man remains a question.
谁杀死了这个年轻人仍然是一个问题。
When we will hold the meeting hasn’t been decided yet.
我们何时召开会议还没有决定。
Whether we can control the floods is still uncertain.
我们能否控制住洪手还不能肯定。
Which team will win the football match is still unknown.
哪支队会赢得足球赛还不知道。
Why he didn’t tell the truth wasn’t quite clear.
他为什么不说实话，还不清楚。
以上例句中的主语从句都是放在句首，但是，有时主语从句太长时，如果放在句首，会使句子显得笨重。因此，我们常用it作形式主语，而把主语从句挪到后面去。可用it作形式主语的主语从句常见结构有：
⒈It is+adj./n.+that-clause.
It’s a pity that… 遗憾的是……
It’s possible that… 可能是…….
⒉It is said/reported that……据说/据报道…
⒊It seems/happened that…似乎/碰巧……
例如：It is possible that he misunderstood what I said.
他可能误解了我说的话。
It is reported that many people are homeless after the floods.
据报道洪水过后很多人无家可归。
It happened that I was free that day.
碰巧那天我有空。
whatever,whoever也可以引导主语从句。
Whoever comes will be welcome. 无论谁来都会受到欢迎。
Whatever she did was right. 不管她做什么都是对的。
三、同步测试
（一）单项选择
⒈Don’t always ______ your own opinion.
A.stick B. stick to C. stick in D. insist in
⒉His mistakes _____ his failure.
A. led to B. led of C. lead on D. lead for
⒊The Second World War broke out in _____ when Einstein was in ______.
A. the early 1940s; the USA B. 1937; Switzerland
C. the late 1930s; the USA D. the thirties; France
⒋My sister ______ an invitation but she didn’t _____ it.
A. accepted; receive B. received; accepted
C. accepted; accept D. received; accept
⒌By the time I ______ the bus station, the bus _______.
A. got to/left B. reached/has left
C. arrived/has gone D. left/arrived
⒍_____ five years _____ the book about pollution.
A. It spent him/to finish B. It spent him/finishing
C. He spent/finishing D. He spent/to finish
⒎Facing this _____ problem, I found myself _____ about how to work it out.
A. puzzled; puzzled B. puzzled; puzzling
C. puzzling; puzzled D. puzzling; puzzling
⒏In the daytime the stars are not seen to twinkle ______.
A. in a apace B. in the space C. in space D. on space
⒐______, paper was first made in China.
A. It is known to all B. We all know
C. It is known that D. As it known to all
⒑______ we will go to the beach tomorrow depends on the weather.
A. Why B. If C. Where D. Whether
⒒Nobody knew _______.
A. where he comes B. where he was from
C. where he is from D. where does he come from
⒓Computers can only give out _____ has been stored in them.
A. that B. which C. what D. anything
⒔She wanted to know ______.
A. whether I knew her and where did she work.
B. if I knew her and the factory she worked there.
C. whether I knew her and the factory she worked.
D. if I know her and the factory where she worked.
⒕It doesn’t matter _____ I rest or not.
A. if B. whether C. that D. when
⒖The trouble is ______ we are short of tools.
A. what B. that C. how D. which
⒗That is ______ there appears a rainbow in the sky.
A. what B. when C. why D. however
⒘The thought ______ he might fail in the final exam worried him.
A. which B. that C. when D. /
⒙_____ I will accept the gift is none of your business.
A. If B. Whether C. What D. Which
⒚_____ wants the book many have it.
A. who B. Whoever C. Anyone D. The person
⒛The problem is _____ will go.
A. that B. that who C. who D. whoever
（二）阅读理解
A
In the year 2000, the world is going to have a population of about 8 billion(十亿). Most scientists agree that the most severe problem is food supply.
Who is going to feed all those people? Where is the food going to come from? Are we going to have enough food? Are we going to produce more artificial(人选的) food?
One way of improving the situation is for people to eat less meat. Why? Because it takes 4 kilos(公斤) of grain protein(蛋白质) to produce half a kilo of meat protein. Clearly, there is not going to be sufficient meat protein for 8 billion people. Gherefore, it will also necesssary to change eating habits because meat is the main part of many people’s food today.
A possible solution to this latter problem is the soybean.(大豆) The soybean plant produces beans which have a very high fat and proteim content. Scientists can now make these look and taste like real meat. They can also make many other artificial products such as soybean milk, for example, which has a taste of milk and can be used in cooking in very much he same ways as cow’s milk. In fact, one woman in the United States fed her family only on soybeans for year! She gave them soybean beef, soybean chicken, soybean milk, and sometimes just soybeans. Possibly, we are all going to eat soybeans in the future and finally give up meat completely from our tables.
⒈What is the main subject of the passage?
A. A solution to man’s food problem.
B. A solution to the population problem.
C. Advantages of soybean.
D. How to develop good eating habits.
⒉According to the passage, meat will completely disappear in the future because _____.
A. people have to spend too much time energy to produce it
B. too much grain protein is needed to produce it
C. it contains too much fat and protein
D. it is no good to the health
⒊According to the passage, the main part of food that many people are eating today is ____.
A. soybeans B. grain C. meat D. milk
⒋In this passage, “artificial food” refers to food made from _____.
A. milk B. grain C. protein D. soybeans
⒌Soybean meat is similar to real meat _____.
A. in appearance but not in taste.
B. neither in appearance nor in taste.
C. both in appearance and in taste.
D. in taste, but not in appearance.
B
It is true that times are changing for the old people in Brtain. But not all the changes are bad ones. Modern medicine, for example, has made old people healthier than ever before. Aother advantage is that there are many more old people than there used to be. This means that old people often have a good social life with their own clubs and organizations. Old people, too, have more money now than their own parents and grandparents had.
The biggest disadvantage of modem life is loneliness. The young leave home when they grow up and many old people live alone. Fewer old people have brothers and sisters. An old person’s one or two children may have moved to another part of the country.
Even when they live nearby, the young people have their own work to do and their own children to look after. They have not much time for the old. Problems of loneliness often start when people stop work. When people retire they often find it difficult to start a new life without their jobs.
The world has changed so fast since 1900 that it is difficult for old people to understand the problems of the young. And the world is changing even faster these days than it was fifty years ago. It makes you thing, doesn’t it? What will it be like when today’s young people are old?
⒈To the old people, the changes in society are ______.
A. better than they expected
B. not as good as they wish
C. both good and bad
D. difficult to understand
⒉According to this passage, the old people today ______.
A. often go to clubs with their brothers and sisters
B. prefer lonely life to social life
C. live more happily than their parents and grandparents
D. like to share their feelings and thoughts with other people
⒊Although some old people live near their sons or daughters, ______.
A. they still feel lonely
B. they want to move to other places
C. they have no time to look after the young people’s children
D. they like to live with their own brothers and sisters
⒋In the last century, old people did not have so many problems because ______.
A. they had big families
B. they lived with their children
C. the young were king to the old
D. the society didn’t change so rapidly
⒌What is the main idea of this passage?
A. Modern society only belongs to the young.
B. Modern life has brought new problems to the old.
C. Today’s young people are happier than their parents.
D. It is necessary to take better care of the old people.
同步测试参考答案：
（一）⒈B；⒉A；⒊C；⒋D；⒌B；⒍C；⒎C；⒏C；⒐D；⒑D；
⒒B；⒓C；⒔D；⒕B；⒖B；⒗C；⒘B；⒙B；⒚B；⒛C
（二）A：⒈A；⒉B；⒊C；⒋D；⒌C
B：⒈C；⒉D；⒊A；⒋D；⒌B
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit8.doc
标题 高二第八单元
章节 第八单元
关键词 高二英语第八单元
内容
一.教学目的和要求
1.单词和词组：
knee ought ought to still(adj)L.29 四会
medical care bite mouth-to-mouth lay burn(n.) L.30
cut(n.) electric container pool
by mistake pay attention to in a short while L.31
breathe take it easyL.29三会
within handkerchief deal(vt.) deal with wound safety L.30
running water wire guard out of one's reach sideways
firm firmly wherever stomach L.31
aid first aid injure injured L.29 三会
bleed hold up injury poison L.30
quantity throw up nearly L.31
2.日常交际用语：
We must carry her to the side of the road.
You mustn't move someone if they are badly hurt.
You should/shouldn't .…
I ought to go home.
I have to cook supper for my grandmother.
3.语法：
复习情态动词must, should和学习ought to的用法。
二.重点与难点
L.29
1.fist aid急救
指医生未来之前对伤者所采取的急救措拖与处理。其中的aid一词既可作动词也可作名词用，作“帮助”、“援助”、“促使”解。例如：
With the aid of the computer, he worked out the problem. 借助于计算机，他解决了这个难题。
They are determined to aid him in his scientific research. 他的决心对于他的科学研究给予援助。
She came quickly to his aid . 她急忙来帮助他。(=She came quickly to help him.)
在以上的句子中，aid均可被help替换，因为这二个词都有帮助的意思。help含义较广，在日常生活中用的较多，而aid是比较正式的用法，因此在日常生活中不多用。
2.No! Leave her where she is ! 别动他，让她留在原地。
a)句中的leave是及物动词，意思为“留下”、“遗留”。可是在本句中的意思则为“让……处于某种状态”，这时通常跟～ing形式或形容词的复合结构，也可以跟从句。例如：
Don't leave her waiting outside in the rain. 不要让她在外面的雨中等着。
You'd better leave the door open. 你最好把门开着。
Her illness has left her weaker. 她的病使她比以前更虚弱了。
Don't touch the thing on the desk. Leave them as they are. 不要动书桌上的东西，让他的照原样放着。
b)的中的where it is的是地点状语从句。where引导的状语从句可放在句首。例如：
Where there is a will, there is a way . 有志者事竟成。
Please put the books where they were. 请把书放回原处。
3.You mustn't move someone if they are badly hurt. 如果一个人受了重伤，你一定不要挪动他。
a)句中的动词move是作为及物动词用的，意思为“搬动”，同时还有“使……感动”的意思。例如：
The chair is in the way, move it please. 那把椅子碍事，请挪开。
We were deeply moved by what he had done. 我们为他所做的一切深受感动。
move作不及物动词 时，作“活动”、“迁移”“摇动”解。例如：
He was tied so tightly that he couldn't move hand or foot. 他紧紧地被捆住，手脚不能动。
He moved with great difficulty. 他十分艰难地移动着。
The old couple moved to the country after they were retired . 那对夫妻退休以后搬到乡下去了。
b)hurt.既可作及物动词，作“伤害”、“使受伤”解，也可作不及物动词，作“疼痛”、“感到疼痛”解。既可表达身体的受伤，也可以表达情感的伤害。例如：
The little boy has fallen off a ladder and hurt himself . 小男孩从梯子上摔了下来并受了伤。
The driver hurt himself in the accident. 司机在事故中受了伤。
It hurts the eyes to read in such poor light . 在这么弱的灯光下看书会伤害眼睛的。
My feeling were hurt when they talked about me like that. 他们那样谈论我使我的感情受到伤害。
She was hurt to think of being left alone . 他一个人被留下很难过的。
4.“Take it easy! I've just called the First Aid Centre…” 别紧张，我刚刚给急救中心通了电话。
句中的take it easy是“不要着急”、“别紧张”的意思，通常用来安慰别人。类似的有Don't worry. 有时也可说“take things easy”。例如：
Take it easy. Everything will be OK. 不要紧张，一切都会好的。
Take it easy. It's still early and we've got plenty of time. 不要着急。还早着呢况且我们有足够的时间。
The doctor asked Bob to take things easy for a while. 医生让鲍勃先放松一会儿。
5.I ought to go home . 我该回家了。
ought to是情态动词，意思为“应该”。与should意思基本相同，但语气要比should强些。含有“按道理应该……”的意思。例如：
You ought to attend the meeting . 你应该参加那个会议。
I ought to tell you about it before you leave. 我应该在你走之前把这件事告诉你。
It isn't what I ought to do . 这不是我该做的事。
ought to的疑问句式是把ought移至句首，其否定式是把not放在ought和to之间。
例如：
Ought he to go ? Yes, he ought to . 他该去吗？是的，他该去。
He ought not to do that. 他不该做那件事。
L.30
1. Anyone with the right knowledge can give first aid； you don't have to be a doctor.
任何一个有正确的急救知识的人都可以进行急救，不一定非得是个医生才行。
a)这里要注意的是与first aid搭配的动词。除了句中的动词give以外，还可与动词offer或do连用，作“进行急救”，“施行急救”解。例如：
A worker was badly injured in the workshop and his workmates gave him first aid .
一个工人在车间里受了重伤。他的工友们对他进行了急救。
When someone is hurt, first aid should be immediately offered. 当一个人受了伤时，应立即对他进行急救。
b) have to和must都作“必须”解。二者的意思稍有区别，但肯定式基本上可以通用。其否定式(mustn't和don't have to )却在意思上有很大的差别，则不可以通用。
mustn't表示“不能”、“不得”（做某事），有禁止的意思；
don't have to表示“不必（做某事）”，同needn't(do sth)意思相当，含“不必要”之意。例如：
You mustn't park your car in front of the entrance. 你不得把汽车停放在入口处。
You don't have to come. 你不必来。
2.check that the person can breathe. Open the mouth and make sure that there is no food at the back of the mouth. 检查一下，看看这个人还能否呼吸。把掰嘴开，看看口腔后部是否有食物堵住。
句中的check和make sure的意思基本相同，作“核查”“弄确实”解，后面的宾语从句则具有待核实，核查的事情。例如：
Check/Make sure that the gas and lights are turned off before you heave.
离开之前清检查一下煤气，灯是否都关了。
Please go and check/make sure if the baby is asleep. 请去看看孩子睡了没有。
3.Here is some advice for dealing with common injuries… 这儿有条关于处理普通创伤的意见……。
句中的短语动词deal with有多种意思，如“对待某人”、“处理问题”，“计论某事”等。例如：
They try to deal politely with angry customers . 他们的尽量对发怒的顾客彬彬有礼。
How shall we deal with the situation? 我们怎样来处理这个局面呢？
Our teacher will deal with the grammar point in the next lesson. 我们老师下一堂课要讲这个语法点。
另外deal with sb/sth.还有“与某人有社交、商业等关系”的意思。例如：
We don't deal with large impersonal companies. 我们不与那些没有人情味的大公司打交道。
4.However, after a few hours of study you will manage to know enough to save other people's lives .
然而，经过几个小的学习之后，你就会获得足够的知识去救别人的生命了。
我们以前学过enough这一词，是作形容词或副词用的。作形容词时，可以放在它可修饰词之前或之后。例如：
We have enough time (time enough) to get to the airport. 我们来得及赶到机场。
There's enough food (food enough )on the table . 桌上的食物足够吃。
作副词时，放在被修饰的形容词或副词之后，可与不定式或for短语连用。例如：
Is the river deep enough for swimming/to swim in ? 在这条河里游泳水够深吗？
She isn't old enough to go to school. 她不到上学年龄。
She plays well enough for a beginner. 对于初学者说来，她弹奏得相当不错了。
但在这句中的enough则是作为名词来用的，意思是“足够的东西”，作句中动词know的宾语。enough后常跟不定式。作enough的定语。例如：
-Would you please have some more ? 再吃点吗？
-I've had enough. Thank you. 谢谢，我已经吃饱了。
He couldn't earn enough to support the family of five. 他没能挣足够的钱来养活五口之家。
I have enough to do every day. 我每天有足的事情做。
5.If everyone in the country knew first aid , many lives would be saved.
倘若每个国民都懂得急救，那么许多人的生命就可以被挽救。
这是一个表示与现在事实相反的非真实条件句。真实是，并非每个人都会急救，因此许多人的生命都没能得到挽救。在这种非真实的条件句中，从句中的谓语动词用进去时态，如果是be，一律用were，不管是第几人称，主句中的谓语动词则由would/could/might+v.构成。例如：
If I were a bird, I could fly. 如果我是只小鸟，我就能飞了。(事实上我不是小鸟，我也不会飞。)
If he knew the truth, he would tell me.
如果他知道事实真相，他会告诉我。（事实是他不知道，也不会告诉我。）
这一语法现象不是本单元的重点，在以后的语法项目的（即虚拟语气）学习中，再详细解。
6.keep them on a high shelf out of the reach of children. 把它们（毒物）放在小孩够不着的高架上。
句中的介词短语out of one's reach作“够不关”，“拿不到”解，在此reach为名词，意思是手能触及到的范围，与其相对应的短语是within one's reach。例如：
The shelf is so high it is well out of my reach. 架子太高，我根本够不着。
Please have a dictionary within my reach. 请把字典放在我够得着的地方。
7.Don't reach sideways while standing on a ladder. 站在梯子上的时候，不要侧着身子伸手去拿东西。
在这个句子中，reach作为动词用的，意思是“伸手取物”。sideways在此是副词，作“侧着身子”、“向旁边”解。
I can't reach the apples on the top branch. 我够不到最上边树枝上的苹果。
I reached across the table for the jam. 我伸手到桌子那端去拿果酱。
Please reach me the dictionary from the bookshelf. 请把字典从书架上取下来给我。
A crab moves sideways. 螃蟹横着爬行。
He looked sideways at me. 他斜着眼看我。
另外，句中的while standing on a ladder是while you are standing on a ladder的省略。在有些表示时间、地点、条件等的状语从句中，主语和主句中的主语一致时，从句中的主语和谓语的一部分（特别是动词be）常省略。例如：
Don't listen to the radio while doing your homework.(=Don't listen to the radio while you're doing your homework.)
做作业时，不要听收音机。
I visited my professor while in Shanghai.(=I visited my professor while I was in Shanghai.)
在上海期间，我去看望了我的教授。
8. Make sure that your children can not get close to pools, lakes and rivers by themselves.
务必不要让小孩独自去池塘、湖边或江边。
a)句中的get close to…作“到……的近旁”解。例如：
We got close to the old people to see what they were doing.
我们走近哪些老年人看看他们在干什么。
The children were warned not to get close to the fire.
人们警告孩子们不要靠近火。
b)by oneself意思为“单独地”、“独自地”。在句中作状语。例如：
The little girl travelled from London to New York by herself. 那小姑娘独自一个从伦敦旅行到了纽约。
Dinny walked home by himself last night. 迪尼昨晚独自一个人去回家的。
L.31
1.What should you do if a person has drunk poison by mistake? 假如有人误喝了毒药，你该怎么办？
句中的by mistake是固定词组，意为“错误地”、“无心地(做了某事)”例如：
I took your dictionary by mistake. 我拿错了你的词典了。
I used your towel by mistake. 我（无心）用错了你的毛巾了。
在上面的句子中，mistake是作名词用的。另外，mistake作动词用时，常跟for连用，意思是“把……误认为”“错把……当作”。例如：
I mistook you for your brother. 我错把你当成你的兄弟了。
The visitors mistook the house for a hotel. 那些游人把这栋房子当成旅店了。
2.在practice中有这样的句子：
a)you must keep the patient warm if he/she has been in the water a long time .
如果她/他，在水中的时间过长，你必须使病人保暖。
句中的keep the patient warm是keep+宾语+形容词、现在分词或过去分词作宾语补足语的结构，表示“处于（保持）……状态）”。例如：
They closed the door and windows to keep the room clean. 他们将门窗关上以保持房间的清洁。
I'm sorry to have kept you waiting outside a long time . 我很抱歉让您在处面久等了。
She kept her eyes shut and stayed where she was. 她紧闭双眼呆在原地不动。
b)You need to pay attention to the children wherever they are playing.
不论孩子们在哪儿玩耍，作都得留心。
句中的pay attention to为“留心……”、“注意……”之意。这是一个固定词组，其中to是介词，后接名词，代词或动名词。例如：
The teacher asked his students to pay attention to him in class. 老师要求学生在上课时要专心听讲。
Much attention should be paid to the problem of pollution.
污染的问题应给予更多的关注。（要更加关注污染问题）。
3.关于情态动词must, should , ought to的用法小结：
must为“必须”、“一定”、“肯定”之意，在表示推测意义的“肯定”时，只能用在肯定句中。例如：
If the person is bleeding badly, you must try to stop the bleeding.
如果这个人在大量出血，就必须设法给他止血。
If someone is in trouble, we must help him/her.
如果有人遇到了麻烦，我们必须帮助他/她。
这时must主要是用于表示说话人主观上的看法。如表示客观需要，我们可用have to这一结构。另外，must没有时态的变化，一般用于现在时，have to可用于更多的时态。例如：
We have to walk there because we missed the last bus. 由于我们没赶上末班车，只好走着去那儿。
He has to change his mind . 他只好改变主意了。
另外，must和have to的否定式的意思是不同的，例如：
mustn't是“不要……”，有禁止的含义；而don't have to则表示“不必要……”含有“客观上无此必要”的意思。
you mustn't move someone if they are badly hurt. 如果有人受了重伤，一定不要搬动他。
you don't have to tell him this . 你没必要告诉他这件事。
should和ought to：
should和ought to都有“应该”的意思，而且可以通用。should的语气比must弱些，它含有“建议”、“劝告”的语气；ought to的语气比should要强些，强调“有责任”、“有义务（做某事）”的意思。例如：
you should be here earlier. 你应该早点来。
you ought to tell him how to operate the machine. 你应该告诉他如何使用（操作）这台机器。
“I'll start the work tomorrow.”──“No, you should start now.”
“我明天开始这个工作。”──“我想你应该现在开始。”
（在这个句子中，用了should,这时指说话人是以“建议”或“劝告”的口气来同对方在说话。）
如果用ought to替换should,口气就有所不同了。例如：
“I'll start the work tomorrow.”──“No, you ought to start now.”
“我明天开始这个工作。”──“不行，你应该现在开始。”
（这时说话人的口气就有点象上级对下级发出命令或提出责令了。）
should的否定形式是shouldn't；ought to的否定形式是oughtn't to。例如：
you shouldn't put the books here . you ought to put them where they were.
你不应该把书放在这。应该把他们放回原处。
you ought to take good care of your sick grandma. 你应该细心照料生病的祖母。
三.同步测试：
Ⅰ.选择最佳答案：
1. I was rather by what they said about me.
A. hit B. harmed C. hurt D. wounded
2.Badly wounded in back, he had to lie in bed face.
A. the, on his B. the, on the C. his, by the D. his, in his
3.you'll come to see the you have done.
A. bad B. wrong C. mistake D. mistaken
4.The doctor did to save his mother's life.
A. all what he could B. as much as possible
C. all could be done D. as much as could
5.He felt sorry for completed his work on time.
A. not have B. not to have C. not having D. having not
6.She her baby in her arms.
A. fetched B. carried C. sent D. brought
7.Our school is walk from the park.
A. for a half and an hour's B. within one and a half hour's
C. in an hour and a half D. at one and half hour's
8.Lucy tried to for the banana on the shelf, but it was too high.
A. took B. get C. reach D. pick
9.The leaves of the trees gently our faces as we walked along the street.
A. got B. struck C. knocked D. reached
10.That kind of grass always grows best it is wet.
A. there B. in which C. the place where D. where
11.He has a wife and three children to .
A. keep B. hold C. raise D. grow
12.You shouldyourself out of their quarrels.
A. put B. keep C. take D. prevent
13.I don't believe himhe says.
A. whatever B. how C. what D. however
14.Theydo it today,they?
A. needn't, do B. don't need, need C. don't need to, do D. needn't to, need
15.Please keep your mouth and your eyes .
A. closed, open B. close, opened C. close, open D. closing, opened
16.I the book, but I enough money.
A. would have bought, had no B. had bought, hadn't had
C. would buy, had no D. could have bought, had not
17.“When can you finish it ?”“It's hard to say, we'll finish it .”
A. as fast as possibleB. as soon as possible
C. as much as possibleD. as possible as we can
18.She doesn't work as hard as she .
A. did B. used to do C. used to be D. was used to
19.I would tell the reason to would like to know it .
A. those B. whoever C. anyone D. who
20.The box brought here last week is very heavy .
A. being moved B. to be moved C. to move D. moving
Ⅱ.改错：
I gave my servant an old pair trousers to wash and then I entered into my study to do some reading. My servant usually examined my pockets after she washed my clothes, but for some reason she didn't do so this time .
As I was reading, I suddenly remembered I had forgotten a 100-dollar note at the back pocket of the trousers which I had given her to wash. I fell my book night away and went to the bathroom. But it was very late. My servant told me that the trousers had washed in the washing-machine for ten minutes. I had the machine stop at once and pulled my trousers out of it as quickly as I could. I discovered that it had become a ball of waste paper. I stood there, glaring at my servant until she began to cry. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
参考答案：
Ⅰ.1-5 C A B B C 6-10 B B C D D 11-15 A B A C A 16-20 D B A B C
Ⅱ1. Pair后加介词of 2.去掉into 3.将after改成before 4. 将forgotten改为left 5.将at改成in 6.将fell改成dropped 7.将very改成too 8. 在had后加been 9.将stop改成stopped 10.√
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit3.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第三单元
关键词
内容
一【教学目的和要求】
1.单词和词组
二会： L10 gesture Arab Puerto Rico
L11 communicate host
三会： L9 manage dining room type composition
L10 wave nod
L11distance fist juice one another
四会： L10 body language handshake agreement disagreement Asian kiss custom proud
L11 manner manners comfortable guest
2.日常交际用语
Would you like me to …?
Would you like me to do this for you ?
No, thanks. I can manage it myself.
Is there anything else I can do for you ?
No, thank you. Thanks for all your help.
Can/Shall I help you ?
Would you like some help ?
Thanks/Yes, please.
That’s very kind of you.
3.语法
复习和掌握动词不定式的用法。
二【重点与难点分析】
Lesson 9
1.…Would you like me to carry it ? 要我帮你提着它吗？
No, thanks. I can manage it myself. 不用，谢谢。我自己能行。
此句对话是本课对话学习的重点，如何主动提供帮助和如何回答的日常交际用语。
1)当你主动提出帮助某人时（offering help）,可以使用以下用语：
Can I help you ? 我可能帮忙吗？
Can I do sth for you ? 我能帮你干点什么事吗？
Would you like some/any help? 你要帮忙吗？
Would you like me to do sth. for you? 要我帮你做某事吗？
Do you want me to do sth.？你要我做某事吗？
Let me do sth .for you. 我给你做些事吧。
Is there anything (else ) I can do for you ? 还有什么事我能帮忙吗？
2)当别人向你主动提供帮助，而你愿意接受帮助时，可以回答：
Thanks. 多谢。
Yes, please.好的。
Thank you for your help. 谢谢你的帮助。
That’s very kind/nice (of you). （你真是）太好了。
3)当别人向你主动提供帮助，而你想谢绝时，可以回答：
It’s all right. Thank you all the same. 不用了，谢谢你。
No, it’s Ok. Thank you all the same. 不，没关系，谢谢。
No, thanks, but I can manage. 不，谢谢，我能行。
That’s very kind of you, but I can do/manage it myself.
谢谢你的好意，不过我自己能行。
例如：
A. Can I help you with the housework ? 我来帮你做家务吧。
B.No, thanks, but I can do it myself. 不，谢谢，我能自己做。
2.It’s a pleasure to meet you .我很高兴见到你。
表示见面时高兴心情的方式有以下几种：
1)It’s good to see/meet you.
It’s nice to see/meet you.
It’s exciting to see/meet you.
It’s wonderful to see/meet you.
It’s delightful to see/meet you.
2)I’m pleased to meet/see you.
I’m delighted to meet/see you.
I’m glad to meet/see you.
I’m happy to meet/see you.
3)I’ve been looking forward to meeting you.
I’ve been wanting to meet you for a long time.
Lesson 10
1.Although we may not realize it, when we talk with others we make ourselves understood not just by words.
我们同别人谈话时，并不仅限于用言语来让人明白自己的思想，尽管我们可能意识不到这一点。
1)此句是一个复合句。主句是We make ourselves understood not just by words. 它带有两个从句。When we talk with others是时间状语从句；Although we may not realize it是让步状语从句。
2)make sb/sth +过去分词意为“使某人/某事被……”
句中的make ourselves understood直译为“使我们自己被别人了解”，意为“使别人了解我们”。
例如：①The teacher raised his voice trying to make himself heard by the students at the back.
老师提高了嗓音，想让后面的学生听到他所说的话。
②When you speak English, be sure to make yourself understood.
讲英语时，务必要让别人明白你的意思。
2.Nodding the head means agreement, while shaking it means disagreement.
点头表示同意，而摇头则表示不同意。
1)句中的while是连词，连接两个并列的分句，表示前后意义上的对比或转折，译作“然而”。
例如：①I like sports, while he enjoys music. 我喜欢运动，而他喜爱音乐。
②Mum was cooking while Dad was watching TV.妈妈在做饭，而爸爸在看电视。
【注】While作“当……时候”解时，指一段时间，不能用来表示一点时间
①While I was sleeping, a thief came into the house.我睡觉时，小偷进了我的屋。
②While in America, I studied music and painting. 在美国时，我学习音乐和油画。
【注】当while从句中的主语与主句中的主语相同，并含有be动词，助动词或连系动词时，
则while从句中的主语连同be动词，助动词或连系动词一块省略，可用这种结构的还有when, after,
once, until, though, as, since等等。例如：
①While watching TV, she fell asleep.当她看电视时，她睡着了。
②When going to school, I met a friend of mine .上学时，我碰到一个朋友。
2)句中的nodding和shaking都是动词nod和shake的-ing形式，它们所构成的短语分别在句中作主语。
3.These gestures are accepted both by Chinese and English speakers as having the same meanings.
这些姿势对说汉语的人和说英语的人来说，都具有相同的意思。
accept…as意为“认为是……”其中accept意为“接受”、“同意（某种看法）”，as是介词，后接名词或-ing形式。例如：
①I can’t accept you as my assistant.我不能接受你作为我的助手。
②We accept the conclusion as true. 我们承认这个结论是对的。
③Waving one’s arms can be accepted as crying for help. 挥舞双臂可能被人认为是呼救。
4.Take nodding the head for example. 比如说点点头这一动作吧。
Take …for example意为“以……为例”，“比如说……”例如：
①Take this problem for example.以这道题为例。
②Take my family for example.就说我的家庭吧。
5.In some Asian countries it means not “yes” but “No”在某些亚州国家，点头的意思不是“是”，而是“不”。
not…but…是一个连词词组，意为“不是……而是”它连接两个并列的句子成分，表示意思上的转折。例如：
1)Not I but he is a teacher. 不是我而是他是一名教师。
2)I saw not Mary but Joan. 我见到的不是玛丽而是琼。
3)That’s not a pen but a pencil. 那不是钢笔而是铅笔。
4)My mother asked me not to go out but to stay at home. 我妈妈要我呆在家里不要出门。
5)He was born not in Beijing but in Tianjin. 他不是生于北京而是生于天津。
【注】not…but连接两个主语时，谓语动词要与紧靠它的主语在人称和数上一致。试比较。
Not the students but the teacher is hoping to go there. 不是学生而是老师希望去那儿。
Not the teacher but the students are hoping to go there. 不是老师而是学生希望去那儿。
6.French people kiss each other hello and goodbye more often than British people.
法国人在见面和告别时相互亲吻比英国人多。
1)kiss sb. goodbye/hello意思是say goodbye /hello to sb. with a kiss.
I kissed her good night. 晚上我与她吻别。
She kissed her mother hello as soon as she got home. 她一到家就亲吻她的妈妈表示问好。
2)kiss v.（风、浪）轻拂
The wind was gently kissing the trees. 微风轻拂着树枝。
7.Generally speaking, people from English-speaking countries do not touch each other very much.
一般地说，英语国家的人不大彼此触碰。
English-speaking countries意为“说英语的国家。”English-speaking是复合词，作定语，修饰countries,这三个词在逻辑上有主谓宾的关系，speaking可看作是countries的动作，是主动关系，因此用-ing形式，English可看作为speaking的逻辑宾语。
8.In Arab countries, you eat using the fingers of your right hand; the left hand is not used at all.
在阿拉伯国家，人们用右手的手指吃饭，左手是根本不用的。
此句中的using the fingers of you right hand是-ing短语，在句中用作方式状语，修饰谓语动词作eat。例如：
①Children usually count the numbers using their fingers .孩子们通常板着指头来数数。
②We show disagreement shaking our heads.我们摇头表示不同意。
9.In parts of Asia you must not sit with your feet pointing at another person.
在亚洲的某些地区，你不可坐着把脚跷起对着别人。
with your feet pointing at another person是一种“with+复合宾语”的结构，又叫独立主格结构，它是由“with+名词+分词或分词短语”组成，在句中作状语表示伴随动作。分词的形式取决于该动词与前面名词之间的关系，是主动关系，用现在分词，是被动关系，用过去分词。
例如：①The boy lay on the grass, with his eyes looking at the stars in the sky.
小男孩躺在草地上，眼睛望着天上的星星。
②Father usually works in his study with the door locked.
父亲通常锁着门在书房工作。
10.Foreigners should follow these customs when they are visiting these countries.
外国人到这些国家参观访问，就应当遵守这些习俗。
follow意为“遵循，听从，依照……行事。”例如：
We should follow the rules of the lab when we are doing experiments.
我们做实验时，就要遵守实验室的规则。
Lesson 11
1.It is good manners for an Arab to stand close to his friend when they are talking.
阿拉伯人和朋友谈话时，与他站得很近，这是表示有礼貌。
1)manner作“礼貌”讲时，要用复数形式manners.
例如：It is bad manners to leave without saying goodbye. 不辞而别很不礼貌。
2)形式主语it的句型
It is/was +adj/n +(for sb)to do sth.
句型中的for sb to do sth是不定式的复合结构，它是形式主语it所代表的真正主语，其中
的for sb是不定式的逻辑主语。例如：
①It is important for us to learn English well. 学好英语对我们来说很重要。
②It is our duty to help others .帮助别人是我们的责任。
2.The Arab who is friendly will stand close to his friend, but the Englishman will move back in order to keep a certain distance away.
表现友好的阿拉伯人会站得离他的朋友很近，而英国人则会往后挪动，以保持一定距离。句中的keep a certain distance away意为“保持一定的距离”其中certain意为“某个”，“一定的”“某种程度，”在句中作定语。例如：
There is a certain distance between the village and the railway station.
在村庄和火车站之间还有一定的距离。
3.City people in Britain and the United States stand closer than those who live in the country.
英国和美国的城里人比乡下人站的距离近。
句中的those who…相当于peope who,意为“凡……的人”。表示的是两者以上的不定数量。例如：
Those who want to visit the exhibition may write down your names here.
凡想去参观展览会的人可以在我这签名。
试比较：①Anybody who breaks the rules is punished.任何违反规章制度的人将受到惩罚。
②Those who break the rules are punished.
注意主从句的谓语动词要保持一致。
在①句中，主句的主语是Anybody,谓语是is punished, 用单数，Who breaks the rules是定语从句，修饰Anybody, who在从句中作主语，代表Anybody,所以谓语动词breaks也要用单数形式。
在②句中，主句的主语是Those, 谓语是are punished。用复数，who break the rules是定语从句，修饰Those、who在从句中作主语，代表Those，所以谓语动词要用复数形式break。
Lesson 12
Grammar: the Infinitive动词不定式
动词不定式的形式是to+v.,没有人称和数的变化，但有时态和语态的变化，它可以有自己的宾语，也可以被状语修饰，不定式和它自己的宾语或状语组成不定式短语。不定式或不定式短语在句中可充当主语、宾语、表语、宾补、定语和状语，但不能充当谓语，所以它是非谓语动词的一种，在checkpoint3中列举的7个例句说明了不定式的句法作用。
They don’t like to be too close to one another(不定短语作宾语)
They will move back to keep a certain distance away.(不定式短语作目的状语)
Would you like me to do something for you ?(不定式短语作宾语补足语)
Have you got anything to say ?(不定式短语作定语)
It’s a pleasure to meet you.（不定式短语作主语）
Waving one’s hand is to say “Goodbye”.（不定式短语作表语）
I don’t know how to communicate with foreigners .(不定式短语作宾语)
下面再举例归纳说明动词不定式的句法功能。
1.作主语
To learn English well isn’t easy 要学好英语不容易。
【注】①由于主语过长，所以常用it作形式主语。It isn’t easy to learn English well.
②不定式短语作主语时，谓语动词用单数。
2.作表语
Our work is to clean the windows. 我们的任务是擦窗户。
My idea is to plant some flowers in our garden. 我想在花园里种些花。
3.作宾语
I want to visit the Science Museum. 我想参观科学博物馆。
4.作宾语补足语
I’ve got a bad cold. The doctor advised me to have a rest.
我得了重感冒，医生劝我体息一下。
5.作定语
I have something important to tell you.我有重要的事要告诉你。
I’m very busy. I have a lot of work to do .
我很忙，我有很多工作要做。
6.作状语
He woke up only to find every body gone. 他醒来发现人全走了。
He made up his mind to work harder so as to catch up with the others in his class.
为了赶上班里的其他同学，他下决心更加努力地学习。
三【同步测试】
Ⅰ单项选择
1.Will you speak louder so as to make yourself ?
A. hear B. heard C. hearing D. to hear
2.David was busy at work his wife played cards all day long .
A. however B. while C. so D. therefore
3. Is possible to do the experiment in another way ?
A. that B. this C. what D. it
4. He lives in a house which is close a river.
A. by B. to C. with D. from
5. Not the teacher but the students excited.
A. is B. remains C. are D. being
6. It is very important the lessons before the class.
A. previewing B. to preview C. preview D. of previewing
7. They walked towards the mountain with a boy the way.
A. to lead B. leading C. led D. leads
8. I like reading my brother likes sports.
A. when B. as C. then D. while
9. I found it difficult his question.
A. to answer B. answering C. answer D. in answer
10. The two young men looked at as if one didn’t know the other.
A. each other B. one another C. one other D. the other
11.I think it bad to talk with your mouth full of food.
A. manner B. manners C. behavior D. polite
12. Though he had often made his little sister , today he was made by his little sister.
A. cry, to cry B. crying , crying C. cry, cry D. to cry, cry
13.My mother will not us to go out at night.
A. have B. let C. agree D. allow
14. The scientist came into the lab, by a group of students.
A. following B. to follow C. followed D. to be followed
15. She waved her hands in order to make herself .
A. seeing B. see C. to see D. seen
16. to take the English evening course please fill in this form .
A. Those who want B. Anybodny wants
C. Those that want D. people want
17. Canada is country. Have you ever been there ?
A. an English-spoken B. a speaking-English
C. a spoken-English D. an English-speaking
18. He usually works in his room with the door and windows .
A. closed B. close C. closing D. to be closed
19. you must be quiet or leave the room.
A. either B. both C. neither D. never
20. There was a terrible noise a sudden flash.
A. Was followed B. following C. to follow D. followed
Ⅱ.阅读理解
A
A well-known old man was being interviewed(采访)and was asked if it was correct that he has just celebrated his ninety-ninth birthday.
“That’s right.” said the old man. “Ninety-nine years old, and I haven’t an enemy in the world. They’re all dead.”
“Well, sir ”, said the interviewer , “I hope very much to have the honour of interviewing you on your hundredth birthday.”
The old man looked at the young man closely, and said, I can’t see why you shouldn’t. You look fit and healthy to me !”
1. The old man said he had not an enemy in the world, which show that he was a very.
A. friendly man -he never made any enemies.
B. healthy man-he lived longer than all his enemies.
C. lucky man-his enemies had all died.
D. terrible man -he had got rid of all his enemies.
2. When the interviewer said that he hoped very much to have the honour of interviewing the old man again the following year.
A. he was trying to make the old man happy.
B. he wished he himself would live another year.
C. he did not believe the old man would live to be one hundred.
D. he did not believe he would interview the old man again.
3. When the old man said, “I can’t see why you shouldn’t,” what he meant was .
A. “you must try to live another year to interview me again next year. ”
B. “of course you can see me again since you’re so fit and healthy.”
C. “If I live to a hundred years, you should interview me again
D. “unless you live another year, you wouldn’t be able to interview me again.”
4. What kind of man would you say the old man was ?
A. He was silly.
B. He was unpleasant.
C. He was very proud and sure of his health.
D. He was very impolite to young people.
B
Annealing is a way of making metal softer by heating it and then letting it cool very slowly. If metal is heated and then cooled very quickly, for example by dipping（浸）it in water, it will be very hard but also very brittle（脆）-that is it will break easily. Metal that has been annealed is soft but does not break as easily. It is possible to make metal as hard or as soft as is wished, by annealing it. The metal is heated, and allowed to cool slowly for a certain length of time. The longer the heated metal takes to cool slowly, the softer it becomes. Annealing, can also be used on other materials, such as glass.
1. Annealing can make metal
A. hard and tough（韧） B. hard but brittle
C. soft but tough D. soft and britte
2. Why do people put hot metal in water ?
A. To make it hard B. To make it soft
C. To make it cool D. To make it brittle
3. In annealing, the required hardness of a metal depends on
A. the quantity of water used B. the temperature of metal
C. the softness of the metal D. the timing of the operation
4. As suggested by the text, how can glass be made less brittle?
A. It can be heated and then cooled quickly.
B. It can be cooled and then heated slowly.
C. It can be heated and then cooled slowly.
D. It can be cooled and then heatly quickly.
【 参考答案】
Ⅰ.单项选择
1. B 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. C 6. B 7. B 8. D 9. A 10. A
11. B 12. A 13. D 14. C 15. D 16. A 17. D 18. A 19. A 20. B
Ⅱ.阅读理解
A.1. B 2. A 3. B 4. C
B.1. C 2. A 3. D 4. C
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit3.3.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第三单元
关键词
内容
一、教法建议
【抛砖引玉】
在不同的国家和地区，表达同一概念，体态语中的手势可能不同，相同的手势却表达不同的概念。例如：表达数字“1”的概念时，我们习惯伸出食指，而瑞士人则伸出拇指；当中国人伸出拇指时绝对不会表示“1”的意思，而是“好”的意思。据说由于手势语的不同，不但产生很多误会，还曾经引起过一些灾难。有一次，一些欧洲海员在地中海游水作乐时不知不觉地游到了海防基地，卫兵见到后向他们大声喊叫，并作出“过来”的手势。此时，海员们意识到离海防工事太近了，但是他们误将卫兵的手势理解为“走开”，于是就向远处游去。警惕的卫兵立即开枪打死了这些不幸者。
在西方国家，有一些特别的、人们都遵循的规矩。不敲门是不能打开关闭的门的；不受邀请是不能进入私人住宅的，当然你自己的住宅除外。在收到礼物时，西方人总是教孩子们说“谢谢”。对于西方人来说，吃饭出声音被视为是不礼貌的，然而在有些国家，这是合适地表达你爱吃主人给你的食物。看来，假如你不知道其它国家的这些规矩，你就会犯可笑的错误。
通过学习本单元，同学们将了解到一些有关身势语的知识，这在跨国语言文化间的交际中具有十分重要的作用。
【指点迷津】
A.单元重点新词读音归类
1.[ ]manage handshake Arab manner
2.[ai]type dining-room
3.[d ]gesture juice
4.[ ]composition nod
5.[u:]communicate juice
6.[ei]handshake wave Asian communicate
7.[i:]agreement disagreement
8.[i]manage composition kiss distance fist
9. [ n]composition Asian
10.[ ]handshake Asian
11.[ ]composition agreement disagreement Arab custom manner distance communicate comfortable
B.单元重点新词透视
1.manage
(1)作及物动词用是“管理、经营；安排，运用；控制”。如：
She has managed the company for many years and managed it very well . 她管理这家公司已经很多年了，而且管理得非常好。
Mike knows how to manage wife when she’s angry . 当他妻子生气时，迈克知道怎样对付。
(2)其后接不定式，作“设法做到……”（含成功的做某事）。如：
We managed to finish the hard work in time . 我们设法及时完成了那项重活。
测试要点：
(1)manage与try的辨异
manage常指“想方设法而成功地做成某事”，强调结果。try常指“试图或努力做某事，成功与否不清楚”。如：
He manageed to get the housework done with very little help .在没有多少帮助的情况下，他把家务活干完了。
He tried to get the housework done with very little help .他企图在没有多少帮助的情况下，把家务活干完。
(2)在交际英语中常用I can manage to / I can manage .
2.wave
(1)作可数名词是“波，波浪，波涛，光或者声的波”。如：The waves rolled on .波涛滚滚。sound waves声波。long / short waves长 / 短波。
(2)作及物或者不及物动词是“波动，漂动，挥手”。如：The flags waved in the winds .旗帜迎风飘扬。
(3)指“情绪的波动，人群的潮涌”。如：Waves of strikes hit the country .罢工的浪潮冲击着这个国家。
测试要点：
wave sb sth = wave sth to sb向某人挥手……
She waved me a greeting . = She waved a greeting to me .她向我挥手致意。
He waved good-by to us .他向我们挥手告别。
3.agreement同意、一致
测试要点：
(1)in agreement表示同意。如：She nodded her head in agreement . 她点头表示同意。
(2)in agreement with和…一致。如：Her opinion is in agreement with mine .她的意见和我的意见一致。
(3)agreement的反义词是disagreement。express one’s disagreement表示某人的不同意见。
4.kiss可作名词、及物动词和不及物动词。意思是“吻，亲吻，用吻表达；轻拂”
The two balls kissed .两球轻轻相碰。
A soft breeze kissed her face . 轻风拂过她的脸。
测试要点：
(1)kiss sb + on + the + check吻某人的脸蛋
(2)kiss sb goodbye = kiss goodbye to sb向某人吻别，kiss hello to sb向某人问好
(3)give sb a kiss吻某人一下
(4)习语：kiss the dust / ground承认彻底失败，kiss of life人工呼吸
5.custom习惯，习俗，风俗
Their customs and habits are different from ours .他们的风俗习惯与我们的不同。
测试要点：
(1)区别custom与habit
custom主要是群体性的不断演变而成的习惯，代表一个国家或者地区的传统，即“习俗、风俗”。habit是指一个动作反复发生，习惯成自然。如：
Social customs are greatly different from country to country .各个国家的社会风俗习惯很不相同。
Biting his fingers is his habit .咬手指是他的习惯。
(2)customs常作“关税”，the Customs海关。
6.proud骄傲的；自豪的。该词的名词形式为pride .
测试要点：
(1)be proud of对……骄傲
We are proud of our great motherland . 我们为我们伟大的祖国骄傲。
(2)be proud to do干……骄傲
She is proud to have taken part in the Asian Games .她为能参加了亚运会而自豪。
(3)feel proud that为……自豪
Our football team feels proud that it has won every match this year .我们的足球队今年每次比赛都赢了，这使全队都感到骄傲。
(4)take (a) pride in以……自豪，对……得意
He takes pride in his success .= He is proud of his success .
(5)with pride = proudly骄傲地，自豪地
(6)谚语：Pride will have a fall .= Pride goes before a fall . 骄者必败。
7.manner方式；态度；举止。manners礼貌
测试要点：
(1)用作单数是“方式，方法，风格，手法”。如：I love duck cooked in Chinese manner / way .我爱吃中国烧法的鸭子。I don’t like his manner of speaking .我不喜欢他的说话方式。
(2)with manners有礼貌，without manners没礼貌
(3)have good manners有礼貌，have no manners没礼貌
(4)区别下列表达“方法”的名词，注意各自的介词搭配：manner , way , means , method
manner指“行为的特殊方式或独特的个人方法”。in the Western manner以西方式的，in a manner = in a way在一定程度上
way常指“一般方式，方法”。in this way用这种方法
means多指抽象或概括性意义的“手段，方法”。by this means有这种方法
method着重为达到目的或解决问题而采取的有系统、有步骤的方法，着重方法的准确有效。with this method用这种方法
8.distance距离
测试要点：
(1)at a distance稍远一点，at a distance of two miles在2英里的距离处，in the distance在远方。如：This oil-painting looks beautiful at a distance .这幅油画站稍远一点看很好看。
In the dark night , we could a light in the distance at sea .在漆黑的夜晚，我们在海上能看到远处的灯光。
(2)distance的形容词是distant
(3)What is the distance from…to …?哪离哪有多远？
(4)make a long distance call打长途电话
C.单元重点词组扫瞄
1.It is a pleasure to do …很高兴地干……
2.Would you like me to do…?你想让我干……？
3.I can manage it myself .我自己能解决。
4.help sb with cooking a meal帮某人做饭
5.show sb to the dining room领……去餐厅= lead sb to the dining-room
6.do the shooping购物，买东西
7.make oneself understood让别人理解自己 make oneself +过去分词“让自己被明白”make sb do让某人干……
8.by words（抽象的）凭借语言，in words口头上，with words用具体的语言，in deeds行动上
9.not just不只是 You can go there not just by bus , but by train .到那里不仅可以坐汽车，还可以坐火车。
10.send messages to sb向某人传递信息 With the help of satellites, we can send messages to other parts of the world .借助卫星，我们可以向世界其它地区传递信息。
11.accept A as B认为 / 承认A是B The police accepted the story as true .警方认为这事是真的。
These gestures are accepted both by Chinese and English speakers as having the same meaning .这些手势和姿态对说汉语的人和说英语的人都是一样的意思。
12.take…for example以……为榜样，take…as an example以……为榜样
Take water for example , it is made up of two gases──hydrogen and oxygen .以水为例，它是由氢和氧两种气体组成的。
Let’s take Lei Feng as a good example for all of us to follow .让我们把雷锋当作我们大家学习的好榜样。
13.shake hands握手，shake hands with sb = shake sb by the hand和某人握手
14.more often than比……更经常 You watch TV more often than I .你看电视次数比我多。
15.do research on从事……研究 = make research on
16.point at指向，对准，point out指出，point to朝……指去 He pointed his gun at the thief .他把枪对准了小偷。
17.follow customs随俗 Foreigners should follow these customs.外国人应该遵守这些习俗。
18.hold up举起，抬起，支撑，耽误。He held up his hand to ask the teacher a question .
The building of the new road has been held up by bad weather .天气恶劣，新路的修筑受到延误。
19.be close to靠近，接近The bus stop is close to our village .公共汽车站离我们村很近。
20.keep a certain distance away (from)与……保持一定的距离
21.communicate with与……交流（通讯、联系） We can communicate with people in most parts of the world by telephone .我们能够用电话同世界上的大部分地区联系。
22.wait in line 排队等候，wait in a long line排长队
23.shou one’s anger at / on对……发泄脾气
24.worry about / over为……烦恼，be worried about担忧……
25.a day or two = one or two days一两天
It is good manners to write or telephone a day or two later to thank your host .一两天后写信或打电话对东道主表示感谢是礼貌的。
D.大纲规定的单元日常核心交际用语指南
1.Offers and Responses（提供帮助和应答）
发现陌生人或不太熟悉的人有困难，一般用下列句子主动提供帮助。
Can I help you ?/ What can I do for you ?/ Is there anything I can do for you ?/ Do you want me to call you a doctor ?/ Let me carry the luggage for you . / Would you like some coffee ?
如果是熟悉的人或朋友，可直接问对方需要什么帮助。
Would you like me to get you a book ? / Do you want me to call you a taxi ? / If you don’t mind , I’ll go and buy them for you . / Here , take my umbrella .
不需要别人帮助时，还是得先表示谢意。
Please don’t worry . I can manage it myself . / Please don’t bother . / Thank you all the same . / No thanks . / Thank you all the same .
2. Model Dialogues（提供帮助和应答的交际示范）
Rose: Hi , Tom . You are carrying so many books .
Tom: Yes , they are very heavy .
Rose: Can I give you a hand ?
Tom: That’s very kind of you . I’m told you are busy these days .
Rose: Certainly , we’ll have our final exam .
Tom: What can I do for you then ? Can I help you with your English ?
Rose: Please don’t bother . Thanks a lot .
E.单元语法学习目标
不定式高考考什么？
动词不定式因其使用广泛，成为高考题中的热点。近五年高考（1995－）仅单项填空题中，答案要求用动词不定式的有13题。（有些题的答案虽非不定式，却考查了与不定式的搭配或区别。）
现根据其在句中的形式和作用分述如下：
一、否定形式（在to前加not或never）
1.The patient was warned oily food after the operation .(96)
A. to eat not B. eating not C. not to eat D. not eating
二、完成形式 (to have + 过去分词）
1)表示发生在谓语动作（或状态）之前的动作或状态。
2)用在表示“希望”等含义的动词过去式后，表示未曾实现的计划等。
3)ought to have + 过去分词“本应该做，结果却未做”。
2. I would love to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report . (97)
A. to go B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
3.Robert is said abroad , but I don’t know what country he studied in . (99)
A. to study B. to have studied C. to be studying D . to have been studying
三、to的替代作用（承接上文，单独用to来代替整个动词不定式）
4.－I’ll be away on a business trip . Would you mind looking after my cat ? (95)
－Not at all . .
A. I’ve no time B. I’d rather not C. I’d like it D. I’d be happy to
5.The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street , but his mother told him .(95)
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to
6.－Alice , why didn’t you come yesterday ? (97)
－I , but I had an unexpected visitor .
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
四、to的省略与否
7.Paul doesn’t have to be made , he always works hard .(95)
A. learn B. to learn C. learned D. learning
五、句法功能
A.作宾语
不定式与动名词作宾语比较，为高考中的重中之重，重复考查现象明显。
8.We agreed here but so far she hasn’t turned up yet . (95)
A. having met B. meeting C. to meet D. to have met
9.－You were brave enough to raise objections at the meeting . (95)
－Well , now I regret that .
A. to do B. to be done C. to have done D. having done
B.作宾补/主补（上文的考例1，5，7）
10.－Do you think the Stars will beat the Bulls ?
－Yes . They have better players , so I them to win . (99)
A. hope B. expect C. prefer D. want
C.作状语
11.－I had a really good weekend at my uncle’s . (99)
－.
A. Oh , that’s very nice of you B. Congratulations
C. It’s a pleasure D. Oh , I’m glad to hear that
D.作表语
12. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier , it more difficult . (99)
A. not make B. not making C. not to make D. do not make E.作表语
13.When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door “Sorry to miss you ;will call later .” (99)
A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading
参考答案：1-5 CBBDA 6-10 CBCDB 11-13 DCD
二、学海导航
【学法指要】
用本单元所学的关键语汇从A、B、C、D四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。
1.His French was very poor , so he couldn’t make himself . But we made him us . That is , he was made all this .
A. understand ; understand ; to understand
B. to understand ; to understand ; understand
C. understanding ; understanding ; understand
D. understood ; understand ; to understand
【简析】答案选D。了解使役动词make的句型可知为什么选D：make + sb + do使别人干……，make + oneself + 过去分词“使别人明白自己”，sb be + made + to do某人被迫去干……
2. I would love to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report .
A. to go B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
【简析】答案选B。本题大意为：昨晚我本想参加晚会，但我不得不加班工作完成报告。would love / like to do很想干……，would like / love to have done当时很想但未能干……
3.The celebration of Christmas is a western .
A. habit B. manner C. movement D. custom
【简析】答案选D。表达一个民族、国家、地区长期形成的习惯叫习俗，即custom。
4. I talked for a long time , and in the end I make her believe me .
A. tried to B. managed to C. could D. succeeded to
【简析】答案选B。manage to do设法干成了……，try to do设法干……，succeed in doing成功地干……从语境in the end可知最后说服了对方。
5.My first teacher last week and said he was still in good health .
A. shook me by the hand
B. shook me by my hands
C. shook my hand
D. shook hand with me
【答案】选A。和……握手：shake sb by the hand , shake sb’s hands , shake hands with sb。
【妙文赏析】
（一）
The shoulders can bear heavy things . Your father has a great responsibility for the family on his shoulder . When faced with difficulty , the family should stand shoulder to shoulder to overcome it . You should not turn a cold shoulder to your family members . Nor should you give your friends the cold shoulder . Both expressions mean treating others coldly .
肩膀能够负重，你父亲就肩负起家庭担子（have a great responsibility for the family on his shoulder）。有困难时，一家人就应该肩并肩（shoulder to shoulder），同心协力，克服困难。你可不要对家人态度冷淡（turn a / the cold shoulder to sb ），也不要对朋友严厉拒绝（give / show sb a / the cold shoulder），两个短语的意思都是不理睬或者冷落别人。
（二）Indian Sign Language
How would you talk if all your friends spoke a different language ?
Maybe you would talk by making signs the way that American Indians used to do .Long ago , when Indians of one tribe（部落）met Indians of another tribe , they had to make signs with their hands to understand each other .
There are some of the signs they made . Maybe you can make them , too .
When you are hungry , you move your right hand back and forth across your stomach .
When you mean “Let’s eat”, you cup（使成杯形）your right hand and move it up and down in front of your mouth .
When you have had enough to eat , you spread your thumb（姆指）and first finger（食指）apart , and move your hand from your chest to your chin（下巴）.
If you have a stomachache , you put both hands on your stomach , and move them back and forth .
1. In what situation would sign language be used ?
A. When the Indians met each other long ago .
B. When people don’t understand each other’s language .
C. When people who don’t share the same language want to make themselves understood .
D. When people do not make much noise .
2. Long ago , .
A. the Indians had spoken languages .
B. the Indians talked with each other with their hands
C. the Indians of different tribes used sign language to understand each other
D. the Indians preferred to use sign language rather than spoken language
3.Which of the following pictures shows that the Indian was full ?
4.The above picture C shows that .
A. the Indian was inviting us to dinner
B. the Indian had a pain in the stomach
C. the Indian was hungry
D. the Indian had eaten enough
答案：1.B 2.C 3.D 4.B
【思维体操】
请同学们阅读说明后把图和英文配对
WHAT DO THESE GESTURES MEAN？
The following gestures were used by actors in the 19th century . What did they mean , do you know ?
Match the actors’ speech to the gesture :
1. “Please , please , my darling never leave me …or I shall die !”
2. “Never ! How can you think that I would do such a thing !”
3. “I warn you , young man . If I find you doing that again , I shall punish you !”
4. “Of course , my dear , help yourself !”
5. “Please be sensible ! You must stop this stupid behaviour（行为）or you will lose everything !”
6. “I don’t care what I do .”
7. “Get away from me , you filthy, filthy beast（畜生）!”
8. “Of course !Don’t worry about it ! I’ll do it !”
9. “ I will finish my work even if it kills me !”
10. “I don’t agree with you . Now you listen to me !”
11. “Don’t do it . Please don’t do it !”
12.“Perhaps you would like to come for a little walk with me ?”
key:
1.B 2.C 3.E 4.C 5.H 6.F 7.K 8.D 9.I 10.J 11. L 12.A
三、智能显示
【心中有数】
从学习不定期式开始到小品词to的突破
我们在学习英语过程中，碰到了许多以to结尾的词。To是介词还是不定式符号，这是我们要特别注意的。本文试将常见的这些词组作些归纳。下面是根据高考英语《考试说明》而列举的一些常见的以to结尾的词组或短语，希望同学们从高二就开始把不定式的知识点牢牢掌握，并在学习中不断总结。只有这样，才能对不定式的运用游刃有余，在以后的高考测试中稳操胜券。
（一）、常见以介词to结尾的词组。
pay attention to注意、lead to导致、according to按照、object to反对、refer to参考，指、stick to坚持、refer + ing…to + ing喜爱……不爱……、belong to属于、add up to总起来，总结着、next to挨着、get (become、be) used to习惯于、listen to听、do good to对……有益、do harm to对……有害、help oneself to请吃……、be accustomed to习惯于、say hello to向……问好、in addition to除……之外、turn to翻到，求助于、look forward to盼望、set five to放心、devote…to …献于……
1. (MET’88)Mother us stories when we were young .
A. was used to tell B. is used to telling C. used to tell D. used to telling
sb . be used to doing习惯于、sb . used to do过去常干、sth . be used to do被用来干……故选C。
2. (MET’90上海题)We’re looking forward to your country .
A. visiting B. visit C. be visiting D. being visiting
3. (MET’95上海题)She looks forward every spring to the flower lined garden .
A. visit B. paying C. walk in D. walking in
只要掌握look forward to中的to为介词，那么2选A，3选D。至于短语动词中的夹杂状语起修饰性并不喧宾夺主。如：
She found herself looking forward more and more eagerly to the holiday at home .
They looked forward very much to seeing him again .
（二）、常见以不定式符号to结尾的词组。
so as to以便做、It’s worth while + ing (to do )值得做、in order to目的是做、ought to应该做、be willing to乐意做、It takes sb . time to do花时间做、be anxious to急于做、happen to碰巧做、be eager to渴望做、It costs sb + money to do花钱做、be afraid to怕做、chance to恰巧做、be ready to准备做，乐意做、be so + adj + as to do如此……以致于……、be about to正准备做，将做、make up one’t mind to决心做、pretend to假装做、be + adj + enough to do足以做、intend do打算做、used to过去常做、be too …to do太……以致于、would / should love to很想做、plan to计划做、expect to期待做、prefer to do…rather than do宁愿做……而不愿做……
4. (NMET’94) Rather than on a crowded bus , he always prefers a bicycle .
A. ride , ride B. riding , ride C. ride , to ride D. to ride , riding
5. (NMET’90) Tom kept quiet about the accident lose his job .
A. so not as to B. so as not to C. so as to not D. not so as to
6. (MET’93上海题) Children at the beginning of this century a lot and themselves greatly even without television .
A. used to read …enjoying
B. used to read …enjoyed
C. were used to reading…enjoy
D. were used to read …enjoying
答案：4.C 5.B 6.B
（三）、特殊结构中的to。
①to构成的短语作插入语。如：
to tell (you) the truth说真的、Truth to tell实不相瞒、to begin / start with首先、to be more exact确切地讲、to make a long story short长话短说，简而言之、to be fair公平地说，凭心而论、to be sure肯定地，毫无疑问地……
②保留to去代表省略的不定式。如：
－Would you like to come to dinner tonight ? (NMET’94)
－I’d like to , but I’m too busy .
－Tom , do you plan to go skating ?
－Yes , we plan to .
③平行结构中的小品词to不可省。如：
To see is to believe . = Seeing is believing .
It’s better to laugh than to cry .
④介词to加名词频频亮相。如：
a monument to the heroes、a bridge to knowledge、a visitor to the city、answer to this problem、keys to the exercises、the entrance to / of a valley、the key to the door、the key to success、a traitor to one’s country、the passage to the room、the notes to the text…
⑤介词to与“情感、心理”相连。如：
to one’s (great) surprise / satisfaction / joy / disappointment / regret…
⑥奇怪的小品副词to。如：
I guessed from the hurrying to and fro〈来来回回〉in the house that something unusual was about to happen .
（四）、to是介词还是不定式符号，根据不同的含义而定。
1.agree to同意
I don’t agree to his proposal . (to是介词)
He agreed to help me two days later .(to是不定式符号)
2.come to来；谈论
He has a lot of money coming to him . (to是介词)
He came to realize that he was wrong .(to是不定式符号)
3.get to到达；逐步
When did you get to the station . (to是介词)
You’ll get to like the work . (to是不定式符号)
4.on the / one’s way to在……途中；即将……
I lost my pen on the way to school . (to是介词)
She is on the way to see a film . (to是不定式符号)
5.happen to发生；碰巧
What happened to you ? (to是介词)
He happened to pass by the station . (to是不定式符号)
（五）、to后与名词、动词构成成语或短语。
go to college上大学 go to school去上学 face to face面对面 put to use利用 get to know知道…… go to bed上床睡觉 go to cinema看电影 sentence sb. to death处死…… come to a stop停止
【动手动脑】
To-infinitive , Infinitive Without To or Just To
英语中不定式有时候要加to，有时候不加to，有时候只要一个to把动词省去不用。到底该怎样正确运用不定式，有些同学对此感到束手无策，那么不妨做下面这些练习，定会对你有所帮助。
1.Don’t ask him to do that if he doesn’t want . (to do , do , to)
2.They could do nothing but . (to wait , wait)
3.We wondered whether (to go , go) forward or turn ,to turn) back .
4.Do what the teacher has told us . (to , to do , do)
5.Hearing this Tom didn’t know whether to laugh or . (to cry , cry)
6.－Would you like to go to the concert with me ?
－Yes , I’d like . (to go , to , go)
7.She doesn’t have to get up so early as she used .(to , to get up)
8. I would rather (to walk , walk) home than (take , to take) a bus .
9.The little child had no choice but . (to cry , cry)
10.Hadn’t you better (to hurry , hurry) if you want to catch the first bus ?
11.－She has to make a special trip to the store to get some salt .
－Does she have ? (to make , to , ×)
12.The policeman let those boys (to go , go), hoping they would learn from their mistake and (to obey , obey) the rules in the future .
13.That’s too good a chance (to let , let) .(pass , to pass)
14.I don’t think he need (tell , to tell) me .
15.I’ll try to help you it . (to do , to )
16.He went to America pennilessly , (return , to return) home forty years as a millionaire .
17.My brother has made a radio (listen , to listen ) to music .
18.They did all they could (help , to help) her .
19.－Ought I to go ?
－Yes , I think you ought . (to , ×)
20.Since you’re tired and sleepy , why not (have , to have) a good sleep ?
21.She has never dared (ask , to ask) them .
22.I dare (to say , say) , it’s going to rain .
23.Are we (bring , to bring) our books to the lecture ?
24.Do (ask , to ask) me if you want anything .
25.Crocodile may , and often do , swimmers . (to attack , attack )
答案及说明：
1.to 2.wait 3.to go , to turn 有对照之意，两个不定式都要带to。 4.to do 5.两个答案都对：whether to laugh or (to) cry可看成成语，译成“啼笑皆非”。6.to 对Would you like to…的回答是：Yes , I’d like to. 7.to 8.walk , take 9.to cry 10.hurry 11.to 对have / has to的回答应该是to。12.go , obey 13.to let , pass 14.tell need第三人称后无词形的变化，说明它是情态动词。 15.to do 16.to return 分词作结果状语表示必然的结果，不定式作结果状语表示没有预料到的结果。 17.to listen has made中的made含义是“制作”，不定式作定语。 18.to help 19.to 20.have why not后接原形动词表示建议。 21.to ask 22.say。I dare say是个固定形式。 23.to bring be to表将来。24.ask。Do / Does / Did放在动词原形前，起强调作用。 25.attack and often do看成插入语，may后接原形动词。
【创新园地】
读谚语，“觅”动物
下列英语谚语中均含动物名称，你能根据字母提示写出它们并把英语句子和后面的汉语句子对照入座吗？
1.When the f preaches , take care of your g .
2.Use a book as a b does flowers .
3.Two d fight for a bone , and a third runs away with it .
4.Though your enemy seem a m , yet watch him like a l .
5.A black h lays a white egg .
6.All a wag their ears .
7.He who rides a t is afraid to dismount .
8.A m remains the same though dresses in silk .
9.Take the b by the horns .
10.Never repeat the words of others like a p .
11.An o is taken by the horns , and a man by the tongue .
12.As the old c crows , so does the young .
13.A thief knows a thief , it is the same with the w .
14.If you run after two h ， you will catch neither .
15.Catch the b before you sell his skin .
16.Where the d is slain , some of her blood will die .
17.As well be hanged for a sheep as for a l .
18.If two men ride on a h ， one must ride behind .
19.If one s leaps over the ditch , all the rest will follow .
20.Who will bell the c ?
A.有谁敢去冒这个险哪？ B.先捉到熊再卖皮。（勿过早乐观。） C.勿鹦鹉学舌。 D.黑鸡生白蛋。丑妇生俊儿。 E.听到狐狸说教，当心鹅儿被盗。 F.榜样的力量是无穷的。 G.一心不能二用。 H.处理难局要果断。 I.即使敌人像老鼠，也要当作狮子防。（不怕强敌，只怕轻敌。） J.像蜜蜂采花那样利用书。（读书要善于吸取其精华。） K.驴子都爱扇耳朵。（驴子摆耳朵，傻瓜装聪明。） L.鹬蚌相争，渔翁得利。 M.老公鸡怎么啼，小公鸡怎么叫。（子女学父母。） N.牛因长角而被执，人因失言而陷身。 O.豺狼识豺狼，小偷识小偷。（同声相应，同气相投。） P.雁过留声，车过留辙。 Q.一不做，二不休。（索性蛮干。） R.骑虎难下，进退两难。 S.即便身穿绸缎，猴子还是猴子。 T.凡事总有先和后。（有先必有后。）
（读谚语，“觅”动物）答案
1.fox , geese 2.bee 3.dogs 4.mouse , lion 5.hen 6.asses 7.tiger 8.monkey 9.bull 10.parrot 11.ox 12.cock 13.wolf 14.hares 15.bear 16.deer 17.lamb 18.horse 19.sheep 20.cat
A－20，B－15，C－10，D－5，E－1，F－19，G－14，H－9，I－4，J－2，K－6，L－3，M－12，N－11，O－13，P－16，Q－17，R－7，S－8，T－18
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit5.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第五单元
关键词
内容
一、教学目的和要求
1.单词和词组
二会：L17 Charlie Chaplain Comedy intend
L18 moustache swing contribution
L19 California Pianist
L20 Syd Switzerland bring up
三会：L17 direct director particular actress act
L18 Lifetime silent add…to uncertain be uncertain about bury honor stage
L19 Search in(one's) search for Wooden mouthful piano play the piano excite manager
四会：L17 Line
L18 Set off after a (short) while appearance
L19 set(νt.) storm as if in a burry have … on
L20 film(νt.) pick out
2.日常交际英语
What do you plan to do next?
We intend to… next January
I hope it will be very successful.
It will certainly be very…
What are your plans for the future?
3.语法：复习限制性和非限制性定语从句
二、重点与难点分析
Lesson 17
1.Some of us do not know much about the theatre.我们中有一些人还不太懂得戏剧。
1)句中的动词短语know much about意为“对…了解很多”，&127;其中much可用a little，little ,all , something , nothing 等词替换，&127;以表示不同程度上的了解。know about或know of表示间接地“了解”，“听说”，“知道”有关情况。例如：
① I happened to know about him, but I didn't know him .&127;我碰巧知道他的有关情况， 可我不认识他。
②She knows all about Europe.她对欧洲的一切很熟悉。
2)句中的“theatre”不作“剧院”解，而作“戏剧”或“戏剧艺术”解，&127;是不可数名词，通常它的前面要用定冠词“the”，例如：
The director gave us a lecture on the theatre.那位导演给我们作过一次有关戏剧艺术的报告。
2.Could you explain exactly what you do? 你能准确地解释一下你干的工作吗?
explain意为“解释”，“说明”名词形式是 explanation
explain不能接双宾语，用作单宾语动词。应该说explain sth. to sb或explain to sb. sth.或what, that, how, why等引导的宾语从句。不能说explain sb. sth.例如：
①Please explain the rule to the students.请把这条规则给学生们解释一下。
②I explained to him how the machine was used.我向他们解释这台机器怎么用。
③She explained that she could not come.她解释说她不能来了。
3.Then for a period of several weeks we practise doing the play.随后的几个星期，我们就排演了这部剧。
1)Practise sth.或practise doing sth.动词practise后面不能接不定式。例如：
①He is practising the piano now.他正在练习弹钢琴。
②You must practise speaking English more.你必须多练习说英语。
2)period表示“一段时间”，一般指不具体的一段时间，如for a long / short period,或for a period of several weeks/days如表示一段具体的时间，通常不用period，如可以说for three weeks，而不说for a period of three weeks.例如：
I'm going to stay here for a period of several days.我打算在这儿停留几天。
period表示“时代”、“时期”。如：
The first part of the Great Wall was built during the Spring and Autumn period.长城最早一部分建于春秋时期。
△ period表示“一节课”。如：
That's all for this period.这节课就上到这里为止。
4.The timing is very important, not only for the movements but also for the lines of the dialogue.
时间的安排非常重要，这不仅对于剧情的变化，而且对于对白中的台词都是如此。
句中的not only…but also…不仅…而且是连词词组，边接两个相同句子成分。
a.连接主语(句中的谓语动词单复数按靠近原则)
①Not only you but also he has been to Guangzhou.不仅你还有他也去过广州。
②Not only he but also I am a doctor.不仅他而且我也是医生。
b.连接谓语动词
Mary can not only sing but also dance.玛丽不仅会唱歌，而且能跳舞。
c.连接宾语
I saw not only Mary but also Betty.我不仅见到了玛丽，还见到了贝蒂。
d.连接状语
We study English not only in class but also after school.我们不仅在课上学英语，而 且放学后也学英语。
e.连接表语
Mr. Li is not only my teacher but also my good friend .&127;李先生不但是我的老师，而且是我的好朋友。
f.连接补足语
He was elected not only monitor but also League branch secretary .&127;他不仅当选为班长，还当选为团支部书记。
△ not only … but also还可以连接两个分句，但第一个分句的主谓语要倒装。
Not only did the teachers take part in the English evening party, but also they sang at the party.老师们不仅参加了英语晚会，而且在晚会上唱了歌。
5.I've chosen the main actors and we intend to put it on next January.
我已经选好了主要演员，打算在明年一月上演。
句中的动词intend vt意为“打算”“存心”“有…的意图”后面跟不定式作宾语，即intend to do sth.
①What do you intend to do today?你今天打算干什么?
I intend to see a film.我打算去看电影。
②I have made a mistake, though I didn't intend to.我犯了一个错误，尽管我不是存心要犯的。
Lesson 18
1.Charlin Chaplain ,who died in 1977, is considered one of the greatest and funniest actors in the history of the cinema.查理卓别林于1977年逝世，他被认为是电影史上最伟大，最滑稽的演员之一。
1)consider sb/sth(to be)…意为“把…认为是…”这个复合结构的被动式是be considered (to be)…意思是“被认为是…”“to be”常被省略。例如：
①We consider the experiment (to be)a success.我们认为这次试验是成功的。
②The experiment is considered a success.(被动式)
2)the history of the cinema电影艺术史。
句中的cinema不作“电影院”讲，而是“电影艺术”
The cinema is an important form of art.电影是一种很重要的艺术形式。
2.As a result , Chaplin got his first film art in the States.结果，&127;卓别林就在美 国得到他的第一个电影角色。
句中的“part”意为“角色”，是可数名数。例如：
She had the leading part in the play.她在这部剧中扮演主要角色。
the states=the United States美国
3.Even his way of walking down the street and turning a corner could be recognized as his own.甚至他在街上走路和在拐角处转弯的那种姿态，&127;都可以认为是他独有的。
1)recognize vt认出，看出,常用于recognize as 短语中，意为“认出是”或“承认是”。
Tom is recognized as the best basketball player in the school.
人们都承认汤姆是学校里最好的篮球运动员。
2)as his own =as his own way .own是不定代词，作介词as的宾语，&127;意为“自己的东西”。也可以用作形容词，作定语，例如：
I like to sleep in my own room.我喜欢睡在自己的房间里。
4.After a short while he started directing films himself.没有多久，&127;卓别林就开始自己导演影片了。
after a while意为“不久以后”，“没过多久”，其中while是名词，意为“一段时间，一会儿”
After a while, the train stopped at a station.
5.Chaplin's earliest films were silent ,because the equipment for adding sound to films had not yet been developed.卓别林最早期的电影是无声电影，因为在那时还没有研制出给电影配音的设备 句中的add…to…意为“增加”、“加进去”，“把…加入到…”例如：①Two added to three makes five.二+三等于五。
②My mother added some more salt to the soup and it tasted much better.
我妈妈往汤里多加了一点盐，汤的味道就好多了。
add up to意为“加起来(达到)”
The cost added up to 200 Yuan .费用达到200元。
6.The development of films with sound became a problem for Chaplin , as he was uncertain about making films with dialogue .&127;有声电影的研制对卓别林来说倒成了问题，因为他对制作有声电影并没有把握。
be uncertain about/of 对…无把握
We are uncertain about the future.我们对未来没有把握。
We are uncertain whether to go (or not).我们对是否要去拿不定主意。
7.Two of his greatest films ,“City Lights”and “Modern Times”were of this kind. ニ的两部最伟大的影片“城市之光”和“摩登时代”就是这一类(&127;没有对白但配有音乐)的影片。介词短语of kind意为“…种类的”，“属于…一类的”。&127;在句中作表语或定语。例如：①I don't like people of that kind.我不喜欢那种人。
②These machines look the same ,but they are of different kinds
这些机器看起来一样，但是种类不同。
8.Chaplin's later films, however, were not well received.但是，&127;卓别林晚期的电影并不太受欢迎。be well received意为“很受欢迎”，常用来表示书刊等出版物以及电影、戏剧等受到的反应。
①The magazine“Readers”is very well received in China.《读者》杂志在中国很受欢迎。
②My speech was very well received.我的讲话很受欢迎。
9.Before he died, he was honored in &127;a number of ways for his contributions to the film industry.在他逝世之前，他由于在电影事业方面的贡献而获得了很多荣誉。1)honor vt.意为“尊敬”be honored for 意为“因…而受到尊敬”。
①Children should honor their parents.孩子应该尊敬父母。
②Miss. Wang was honored for her excellent teaching .王老师由于出色的教学工作而受到表彰尊敬
The students should show great honor to their teachers .&127;学生应该尊敬老师。
短语in honor of 意为“为了尊敬/纪念”
There is a party tonight in honor of the new chairman.
为向新任主席表示敬意，今晚将举行晚会。
2)contribution n.奉献、贡献，后跟介词to,表示对…的贡献。例如：
The invention of the typewriter is a great contribution to printing.ご蜃只的发明是对印刷业的一大贡献。
Lesson 19
1.The film was set in California in the middle of the nineteenth century.
这部影片以19世纪中叶的加利福尼亚为背景。
句中的短语be set in意为“以…为背景”，例如
The novel is set in the 19th century Paris .&127;这部小说是以十九世纪的巴黎为背景的。
2.Peope said gold could easily be picked up by washing sand from the river in a pan of water.
据说，用一个水盒淘洗河里的砂子就可以很容易地把金子筛选出来。
短语动词pick up意为“拾到”、“找到”、“捡起”、“收集到”
①He picked up a wallet on his way to school.他在上学的路上捡到一个钱包。
②Mark has picked up a large number of Chinese stamps.马克已经收集到大量的中国邮票。
3.This was known as “panning for gold”.这就是人们所熟知的“淘金”。
be known as意为“被称为”“大家公认”
①She was well known as an excellent dancer.大家都知道她是一名优秀的舞蹈演员。
②Shanghai is known as the base of China's industry.上海被认为是中国的工业基地。
4.So far, they have been unlucky in their search for gold and have no money at all.サ秸馐蔽止，他们寻找金子一直运气不好，而他们身上一个钱也没有了。
in search for/of 搜寻，寻找
①Some birds fly south in search of winter sun .有些鸟南飞去寻找冬天的温暖。
②Mr. Green came in his search for her.格林先生来找他。
5.Chaplin and his friend are caught on the edge of a mountain in a snow storm in a small wooden house.在一场大风雪中，&127;卓别林和他的朋友被困在山边的一个小木屋里。
句中的be caught意为“陷入困境”“进退两难”。
①My mother was caught in a heavy rain on her way home.
我妈妈在回家的路上遇上了大雨。
②The car was caught between two trucks.小汽车被卡在两辆货车之间
三、同步测试
Ⅰ.单项选择
1.Charlie chaplain is considered one of the greatest actors in the world.
A. to be B. being C. as D./
2.He met my brother, from he got the news of my marriage.
A. whom B. who C. which D. whose
3. These high buildings the beauty of the city of Beijing.
A. add to B. add in C. add up D. add up to
4.The young lady took care of these children they were her own.
A. even if B. as if C. though D. however
5.His parents died when he was only five months old and he was &127; &127; &127;by a friend of his father's
A. set off B. fixed C. brought up D. acted
6.The policemen on a rainy night. They wanted to catch the murderer as soon as possible.
A. set off B. set up C. brought up D. intended
7.I became very nervous when it was my turn to go onto the stage , because I was afraid I might forget my .
A. name B. director C. actress D. lines
8.The police traveled a whole day their search &127; &127; &127; the lost girl.
A. in ,in B. at , for C. In , form D. in ,for
9.-Why are you such a hurry?
-Because an important meeting will start a short while.
A. in ,after B. in , in C. Running ,in D. with ,for
10. If you want to speak English well, you must practise &127; &127; &127; &127; it every day.
A. speaking B. so far C. from then on D. after that
11.This is the best film I have seenl
A. just now B. so far C. from then on D. after that
12. This is one of the problems that badly .
A. needs solving B. need solving C. needs to be solved &127; D. need to solve
13.The director had my sister an important part in a play.
A. child B. women C. girls D. sports
14.I happen to him, but I'm sorry to say I don't &127; &127; &127; &127;him.I've never seen him.
A. know , know B. know about, know
C. know, know about D. know about, know about
15.I didn't quite understand that maths problem ,so I had Li Ying explain once again.
A. to me it B. me it C. me to it D. it to me
16. of my father's workshop has been made manager of the company.
A. Head , the B. The head,/ C. Head ,/ D. The head ,the
17.She is a famous film strand me greasy enjoyed her in that film.
A. action B. act C. acting D. actress
18.He all his pockets and failed to find his purse.
A. searched B. searched for C. looked D. looked for
19.Tom is tall and thin , makes him different from any other student in his class.
A. as B. which C. that D. it
20.He wanted to have a new suit at the tailor's shop.
A. to make B. make C. making D. made
Ⅱ、阅读理解
A
Tokyo: Three snakes, whose poison could kill a person in ten minutes, are guarding a blue star sapphire(蓝宝石&127;)worth nearly six hundred dollars at Japanese exhibition of jewels sent from an Indian museum.
“Normally it would be forbidden to let these poisonous snakes guard exhibition objects. but it's different this time because the jewels are being exhibited at a hotel,“ a police official said.
Exhibition officials said that a person bitten(咬)by one of these snakes would need at least 80ml of an anti-poison medicine to be saved. Medicine was being kept read at a nearby hospital.
Star sapphires and other valuable jewels worth a total of one million dollars are on show behind glass. Hundreds of visitors came to see the special blue star sapphire and were surprised when they saw the sixty-centimeter long brown guards.
1.Using smacks at exhibitions of valuable objects is
A. quite normal B. never allowed C. often necessary D. usually forbidden
2.The jewels were being shown in
A. an Indian hotel B. an Indian museum C. a Japanese hotel D. a Japanese museum
3.Why were the snakes and jewels at the same exhibition?
A. They were both special things from India.
B. The snakes were there to keep the jewels safe.
C. The organizers wanted to do something unusual
D. People liked to visit an exhibition guarded by snakes.
4.Many visitors came to the exhibition because
A. the snakes were on show
B. so many jewels were being exhibited
C. exhibition officials said it was special
D. they were interested in seeing a famous jewel
B
Frank Smithson woke up and leaned over to turn off alarm. clock.“Oh no!” he thought to himself“Another day at that office:a boss who shouts at me all the time.” As Frank went downstairs his eyes fell on a large brown envelope by the door. He was overjoyed when opened it and read the letter inside.“Bigwigs Football pools(足球赌博公司)would like to congratulate you. You have won half a million pounds.”
Frank suddenly came to life. The cigarette(香烟)fell from his lips as he let out a shout that could be heard halfway down the street.
At 11:30 Frank arrived at work.“Please explain why you're so late.”his boss said“Go and jump in the lake,”replied Frank.“I've just come into a little money so this is good bye. Find yourself someone else to shout at.”
That evening Frank was smoking a very expensive Havana cigar(雪茄)when a knock was heard on the door . He rushed to the door . Outside were two men, neatly dressed in grey suits. “Mr. Smithson,”one of them said ,“We're from Bigwoods Pools, I'm afraid there's been a terrible mistake…”
1.What do we know about Frank?
A. He was a lazy man.
B. He was a lucky person.
C. He didn't make a lot of money.
D. He didn't get on well with his boss.
2.When he heard the knock at the door. Frank probably thought .
A. someone had come to make an apology
B. someone had come to give him the money
C. his friends had come to ask about the football pools
D. his friends had come to congratulate him on his luck
3.On hearing “…there's been a terrible mistake…”Frank was most likely to be
A. disappointed B. worried C. nervous D. curious
四、参考答案
Ⅰ.单项选择
1.D 2.A 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.A 7.D 8.D 9.B 10.A 11.B 12.B 13.A 14.B 15.D 16.B 17.C 18.A 19.B 20.D
Ⅱ.阅读理解
A.1.D 2.C 3.B 4.D
B.1.D 2.B 3.A
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit4.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第四单元
关键词 内容
一、【数学目的和要求】
1.单词和词组:
rose check magazine L.13四会
fix face to face take a photograph (of) hand (vt.) L.14
deliver rail
as well L.15
care for L.16
daily L.13三会
chief event immediately develop add lorry L.14
speed
be popular with somebody suitable weekly rewrite L.15
Business Weekly
journalist editor advertisement headline interview L.13二会
get down to photographer L.14
latest publish edition section besides L.15
2.日常交际用语：
Are you /Will you be free then? Yes, I'll be free. I'd like to go.
Let's go together then I'll meet you at the theatre at six-thirty.
Good! See you then.
What time shall we meet? Where is the best place to meet?
What about meeting outside? I suggest….
3.语法：
学习～ing形式作主语和宾语的用法。
二、【重点与难点】
L.13
1. I want to have a look at what's on this weekend. 我想看看本周周末上演的什么。
句中的What's on this weekend是名词性从句，在句中作短语动词look at的宾语。what's on…？是一个固定的表达方式，后跟时间或地点状语，表示“……（时间/地点）上演什么？”on在此是作为副词用的，应重读。on是一个十分活跃的词，作为介词用时，它也可以表示类似的形容词所表示的意思，表示“在……进行之中”例如：What's on at the New Star Cinema tonight? 今晚新星电影院上演什么？
Is there a new film on lately? 最近上演什么新电影了吗？
My parents are on their holidays. 我父母亲正在度假。
They are on a friendly visit to our country. 他们正在对我国进行友好访问。
2. Is there anything good on? 有什么好节目在上演吗？
句中的good是不定代词anything的定语。当形容词作定语修饰象something, anything, nothing这类不定代词时，要把形容词放在这类不定代词之后。例如：
There is nothing important in today's newspaper. 今天报上没有什么重要消息。
Do you have anything interesting to tell us?你有什么有趣的事要告诉我的吗？
3. They are said to be very good. 据说他们很棒。
a. 句中的they指的是前一句中的a pop group（流行音乐演唱团）。
b. 不定式短语to be very good在句中作主语补足语，说明主语（they）的情况。全句相当于：People say they are very good.或It is said that they are very good.在此，句型sb. is said to do和It's said (或They / People say )+that从句所表示的意思是相同的，可以相互替换。作“据说……”，“听说……”解。例如：It's said he works for China Daily (=He is said to work for China Daily.)据说他在《中国日报》社工作。
It's said the bridge is now over 700 years old. (=The bridge is said to be over 700 years old.)据说这座桥已有七百多年历史了。
L.14
1. Reporters are then sent to cover the events.然后记者就被派去采访这些事件。
句中的cover是动词，作“采访”、“报道”解。例如：
The experienced reporters were sent to cover the confrence. 有经验的记者被派去报导大会的消息。
All important events in this area are covered in the local newspapers.
这个地区发生的重要事件，地方的报纸都有报道。
cover是一个十分活跃的词，既可以用作名词，也可以用作动词，翻译时也十分灵活，可以根据在句中的意思灵活翻译。例如：
用作名词时，作“盖子”，“封面”解。
The magazine had a picture of a horse on the cover. 这本杂志封面上画着一匹马。
Our desks and chairs are fitted with loose covers. 我们的桌椅均配有桌套和椅套。
用作动词时，就十分灵活了。请看下面的句子：
She covered her knees with a blanket. 她把毯子盖在膝盖上。
I was covered in/with mud by a passing car. 一辆过路的汽车溅了我一身泥。
His lecture covered the subject thoroughly. 他的演讲对这个问题阐述得很透彻。
The soldiers can cover the distance on foot in an hour. 士兵们可以在一小时内走完这段路程。
Is that word covered in the dictionary? 这部词典里有那个单词吗？
2. As soon as the reporters know what to write about, they get down to work. 新闻记者一旦得知他们所要写的新闻，就着手干起来。
句中的短语动词get down to sth, 作“开始干某事”解，（相当于to begin to do /doing sth.）其中的to是介词，后接名词，代词或～ing形式。例如：
It's time I got down to some serious work. 我该认真干点正事了。
When you get down to something, you should work hard. 当你着手做些事的时候，你应该努力地去做。
While the weather was fine, my father got down to repairing the house. 趁着天气好，我父亲开始修理房屋了。
3.They telephone people and fix a time for a face-to -face interview with them. 他们同有关人士打电话，约定时间同他们进行面对面的采访。
a.句中的face-to -face是一个固定词组，意思是“面对面”，在句中作定语，修饰名词interview.例如：
It's hard for them to have a face-to -face argument. 进行面对面的争论对他们来说不容易。
需要注意的是，如果face to face不连写时，作状语用，意思是“面对面地”，“面对着”，“碰面”。例如：
The hospital and the food store stand face to face. 那家医院正对着食品店。
I've heard of the famous professor, but I never met him face to face. 我听说过那位著名的教授，但是从没和他见过面。
除了这一词组外，类似还有一些，如：heart to hear心连心，贴心的，hand in hand手拉手，arm in arm臂挽臂shoulder to shoulder肩并肩。
b.句中的fix是动词，作“确定”，“约定”解。fix a time for…是“约定时间干某事”的意思。例如：
Have you fixed a date for the wedding?你们举行婚礼的日子确定了吗？
The lecture was fixed for eight o'clock in the morning. 报告会定于早八点举行。
fix还有“修理”“修补”的意思，请看下现的句子：
My watch has stopped. I'll have it fixed. 我的手表停了，我要去修理了。
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit7.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第七单元
关键词
内容
一.教学目的和要求
一.单词和词组：
四会：
L.25 generally speaking notice differently
L.26 settle all the year round be famous for deal a great deal of make use of
L.27 race skin tool
L.28 clear up from time to time
三会：
L.25 tap eastern
L.26 official official language settle struggle struggle against freeze freezing average natural natural gas exploit ordinary refer refer to
L.27 tent baggage block fur basic settlement
二会：
L.25 Dean accent
L.26 Ottawa minus C=centigrade
L.27 hunt Inuit seal
2.日常交际用语：
A lot of people can’t tell the difference between an American accent and a Canadian accent.
Are there many differences?
What do you mean by…?I’m sorry, I don’t follow you.
Do you use American or British spelling?
American spellings are used more and more in Canada now.
3.语法
学习主语和谓语的一致的用法
二.重点与难点分析
Lesson 25
1. A lot of people can’t tell the difference between an American accent and a Canadian accent .许多人分不清美国口音与加拿大口音的区别。
1)tell vt辨别；分辨，判断（常与can, could及be able to连用）
例如：
①It’t difficult to tell her exact age.很难说得出她确切年龄。
②I can’t tell one from the other .我分不清这两者区别。
△ tell the difference(between A and B)说出（A和B之间的）区别，分清（A和B）
The teacher asked me to tell the difference in meaning between “over ”and “above”.
老师要我说出“over”和“above”两个词在词义上的区别。
2)accent意为“口音，音调”。还可以作“重音”解。
①Our maths teacher spoke with a strong Zhejiang accent .我们数学老师说话带有浓重的浙江口音。
②Our English teacher has a bit more American accent . 我们英语老师有较多的美国口音。
③The word “woman” has its accent on the first syllable . “woman”这个词，重音在第一个音节。
2.I thought you were from the States. 我还以为你是美国人呢。
此句表示过去认为，而现在说话时已不这么认为了，因此，动词要用过去式。
例如：Hello, Li Lei, I didn’t know you were here, too .
你好，李雷，我不知道你也在这儿。（表示见到李雷之前不知道。）
3.We fill our cars with “gas”, which is American, but we turn on the “tap”, which is British English.
我们给汽车加油(“gas”)，这是美国英语，我们开水龙头(“tap”)，这是英国英语。
美国英语中，汽油是 “gas”，英国英语是 “Petrol”；美国英语中，水龙头是 “faucet”，英国英语是 “tap”。
下面列举几组常用词来说明美国英语和英国英语在词汇方面的不同──同样的意思却用不同的词汇。
美国英语 英国英语 词义
eraser rubber 橡皮
fallautumn 秋天
mailpost邮件
movie film电影
sickill疾病
store shop商店
vacation holiday 假期
4.Gererally speaking, newspapers follow the American way, but conference reports and school books use British spelling.
一般来说，报纸采用美国英语的拼法，而会议报告则用英国英语的拼法。
1)generally speaking是－ing短语，在句中作插入语，对全句作解释。类似的插入语如下：
strictly speaking 严格地说 personally speaking 就个人而言
frankly speaking 坦率地说 broadly speaking 广义地说
exactly speaking 准确地说
2)句中follow意为“遵循”“听从”“沿着”例如：
①We must follow his advice. 我们要听从他的意见。
②Follow the road until you come to a river .沿着这条路走到河边。
5. you mean it looks strange! I’ll tell you something that does sound strange .
你的意思是说，这看起来很奇怪！我倒可以告诉你一件听起来的确很奇怪的事情。
1)句中的look和sound都是连系动词，连系动词后接形容词作表语一起构成谓语。常见的连系动词有：be, feel, fall, seem, keep, appear, taste, smell, become, grow, get, go, turn, sound, look等等
例如：
①That sounds strange. 听起来很奇怪。
②The silk feels smooth .丝绸摸上去很光滑。
③The leaves have turned green .叶子变绿了。
④It’s getting dark .Let’s go home.天快黑了，咱们回家吧。
⑤The potatoes went bad in the soil .土壤在地里变得坏了。
⑥The apples from this tree taste delicious .这棵树上的苹果很好吃。
2)句中does用来加强语气。助动词do (does, did )常用在肯定句或祈使句中，表示强调。例如：
①I do hope you’ll stay to supper .我真希望你留下来吃晚饭。
②Please do come next time. 下次务必要来呀！
Lesson 26
1.Canada is the second largest country in the world .加拿大是世界上第二个最大的国家。
形容词的最高级形式与序数词second/third连用，表示“居第二/第三位”，如本句的“第二个最大的国家”（the second largest country）例如：
①The yellow River is the second longest river in china .黄河是中国第二条最长的河流。
②Li Lei is the tallest boy in our class. Wang Gang is the second tallest .Who is the third tallest?
李雷是我们班最高的男孩。其次是王钢，第三是谁呢？
2.It is larger than the USA and reaches nearly a quarter of the way round the earth.
它比美国还要大，它的国土的长度几乎达到地球周长的四分之一。
△句中的不及物动词reach意为“延伸”(extend)例如：
①The woods reach as far as the river .这片树林一直延伸到河边。
②The park reaches to the foot of the mountain.这座公园一直延伸到山脚下。
△当reach意为“到达”或“伸手碰到”，是及物动词。例如：
①Can you reach those books on the shelf? 你够得着架了上的那些书吗？
②I reached Beijing about half past six .我大约6点半到达北京。
3.The country covers six of the world’s 24 time areas .加拿大的国土跨过全世界24个时区中的6个。
句中的及物动词cover本意是“覆盖”、“遮盖”，本句中的cover意为“占有（多少面积）”cover还可以作“采访解，请看下列例句中cover的不同词义：
①Please cover the table with a table cloth .请将桌布盖在桌子上。
②We covered twelve miles yesterday.昨天我们走了12英里的路程。
③The city covered ten square miles . 这座城市占地10平方英里。
④His studies covered a wide field.他的研究涉及的范围很广。
⑤He was sent to cover the Science Conference in Beijing .他被派出采访北京的科学大会了。
4.For two centuries English and French settlers struggle against each other to control the country .
为了控制这个国家，来自英法两国的定居者相互争斗长达二个世纪。
struggle against意为“和……斗争”，后接斗争的对象。struggle for意为“为……斗争”，后接斗争的目标。
①They struggled against difficulties .他们与困难搏斗.
②The poor had to struggle for a living. 穷人为了生存而斗争.
5. Today, one province of Canada is French-speaking .现在加拿大有一个省说法语.
English-speaking (说英语的),Chinese-speaking(说汉语的)Russian-speaking (说俄语的)
例如
①Australia is an English-speaking country .澳大利亚是一个讲英语的国家。
②Many countries in South America are spanish-speaking .南美洲很多国家都说两班牙语。
6.As in China, the weather is different from area to area.同中国的情况一样，加拿大的气候也随着地区的不同而不同。
As in china相当于一个省略了的方式状语从句：As it is the case in China …其中as是连词，意为“正如”，“如像”。例如：
①As in your country, we grow wheat in the north, and rice in the south.
正如你们国家情况一样，我们在北方种小麦，在南方种大米。
②As in the last experiment, he got the same result again this time .
正如上次的实验一样，他这次又得到了同样的结果。
7.The temperatures can fall to－60℃, that is 60℃below freezing.气温可降到
－60℃，也就是零下60摄氏度。
1)－60℃读作minns sixty degrees centigrade. Below freezing=below freezing point=below0℃
2)fall to意为“降到”，“落到……上”
The thermometer has fallen to 20℃below zero .温度表已降到零下20摄式度。
8.In the capital, Ottawa, the average of winter temperature is－10 ℃,and in summer 21℃。
在首都渥太华，冬季平均气温是－10℃，夏季是21℃。
句中的average是名词，意为“平均数”“一般水平”。
①The average of 3,8 and 10 is 7. 3,8,10的平均数是7。
②Tom’s work at school is above the average; Harry’s is below the average .
汤姆在学校的功课高于一般水平，哈利的功课却低于一般水平。
△average也可用作形容词，意为“平均的”，“平常的”。
①The average age of the boys in this class is fifteen.这个班男生的平均年龄是15岁。
②What’s the average temperature in your area in summer ?你们地区夏季的平均气温是多少？
9.Plants grow well all the year round and the parks and gardens are famous for their flowers .
一年四季植物生长良好，这里的公园和花园都以花卉而闻名。
1)all the year round是名词词组，意为“一年到头”，“一年四季”
The grassland beyond this mountain has little rain all the year round .山那边的草原终年少雨。
2)be famous for意为“由于……而闻名。be famous as意为“作为……而闻名”。例如：
①Califonia is famous for its fruits .加利福尼亚由于盛产水果而闻名。
②Suzhou is famous for ancient gardens.苏洲以古典园林而闻名于世。
③He is famous as a poet.作为一名诗人，他很有名。
④The west lake is famous as a place of interest .西湖作为一处名胜而闻名天下。
10.Canada has one third of the world’s supply of fresh water .加拿大的淡水供应量占世界的三分之一。
one third意为“三分之一”
分数表达法：英语中分数是由基数词和序数词组成的。分子是基数词，分母是序数词。如果基数词是one，序数词后不加“s”，如果基数词大于one，序数词后必须加“s”。例如：
one fifth五分之一 two fifths五分之二
one fourth四分之一 two thirds三分之二
11.The country has a great deal of coal, oil and natural gas, and these are all exploited for energy .
加拿大拥有大量的煤，石油和天然气，这些全都开发作能源。
1)句中短语a great deal of意为“大量”，后接不可数名词。下面几个词组意思都是“大量”
plenty of ,a large number of , a large amount of a large quantity of
△plenty of和a large quantity of后面既可接可数名词，也可接不可数名词。
a large number of后接可数名词；a large amount of后接不可数名词。例如：
①He spent a great deal of money on books .他买书花了很多钱。
②The squirrel hide a large quantity of nuts inside trees. 松鼠在树杆里藏了很多坚果。
③She had plenty of imagination.她有许多的幻想。
④There are plenty of of eggs in the house .家中有很多鸡蛋。
⑤He lost a great quantity of blood. 他失血过多。
⑥There are a large number of people in the hall .大厅里有很多人。
⑦A large amount of money was spent decorating the house last year.
去年装饰房子花了大量的钱。
2)exploit意为“利用”，“开发”。
①We must exploit every opportunity to learn new things .我们必须要利用一切机会来学习新东西。
②They tried every means to exploit the oil under the sea .他们用了一切方法来开发海底石油。
Lesson 27
1.Others remained in one place and started farms of their own .另外一些人定居下来，开垦自己的农场。
△remain用作不及物动词，意为“逗留”“留下”“剩下”。
①My mother has to remain in hospital until she was better .我妈妈不得不住院，直到身体好转。
②After the fire, nothing remained of my house .火灾之后，我家一无所有。
△remain用作连系动词，意为“仍然是”“还是”，后接形容词或名词表语。
①He remained silent .他保持沉默。
②She remains unmarried .她仍然单身（未婚）。
2.They lived on fish and meat and used to make holes in the ice and catch fish and seals .
他们以食鱼、肉为生，还经常在冰川上打洞捕捉鱼和海豹。
动词短语live on意为“靠吃……为生”。
People in the north mainly live on wheat .北方人主要以食小表为生。
△live by靠……为生
She lives by writing .她靠写作为生。
3.They made clothes and shoes from furs and from skins of seals .
他们用兽毛和海豹皮做衣服和鞋子。
句中短语动词make A from B意为“用B制成A”。例如：
The boy made a boat from wood .那男孩用木头做了一只小船。
上述短语动词make from也可以用make out of代替，意思相同。
make A out of B(用B制成A)被动式是A is made out of B.例如：
The bay made a boat out of wood.(The boat was made out of wood)
4.They made use of animal bones, which they carved into basic tools .
他们利用兽骨，把兽骨雕成基本工具。
①Make good use of your time充分利用你的时间。
②She was making full use of her opportunity to practise English.她正在充分利用一切机会来练习英语。
5.The government has started a new school project in which Inuit teach their own young children.
政府已经开始实施一项兴办学校的新计划，由因努伊特人来教育他们自己的小孩。
句中start意为“发起，开动”，“使……开始”，作此义解时，start不能被begin代替。例如：
①We can’t start the car . There must be something wrong with the engine .
汽车开不动了，肯定是发动机出毛病了。
②He started the project for helping poor blind children .他发起了一项帮助贫困盲童的计划。
Lesson 28
Grammar:语法 Agreement（主谓一致）
1.两个或两个以上做主语用的单数名词用and连接时，谓语动词用复数，但如果and所连接的词是指一个概念或同一个人时，谓语动词则用单数。
Li ying and Li Mei are twin sisters .李英和李梅是孪生姐妹。
The poet and writer has come .那位诗人兼作家来了。（前面用一个冠词，表示同一个人）
2.两个做主语用的名词或代词由介词with连接时，谓语动词一般和with前的名词或代词的人称和数一致。
A woman with a baby is coming to the hospital .一个妇女抱着一个婴儿子向医院走来。
The teacher with two students was in the room .老师和两个学生当时在房间里。
3.当either…or或neither…nor连接两个并列主语时,谓语动词通常和邻近的主语一致。
Either he or I am to attend the parents’ meeting不是他就是我去开家长会。
Neither the children nor the teacher knows anything about it .孩子们和老师都不知道这件事。
4.两个做主语的名词或代词由as well as连接时，谓语动词须和前一名词或代词的人称和数一致。
The girl as well as the boys has learned to drive a car .这个女孩和男孩子一样，也学会了开汽车。
This book, as well as the other two books is borrowed from our school library .
这本书同另外两本书一样，都是从学校图书馆借来的。
5.某些集体名词如family, class, team, audience等主语，如果作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数形式，如果就其中的一个个成员而言，谓语动词用复数形式。
My family is a big one我家是个大家庭。
The family are watching TV.全家人正在看电视。
6.表示时间，金钱，长度等复数名词作主语时，通常作整体看待，谓语动词用单数。
Five minutes is enough. 五分钟就够了。
Two hundred miles is not a long distance .两百英里并不是一个很长的距离。
Two dollars is too dear .十块钱太贵了。
7.动名词和不定式(短语)作主语时，后面的谓语动词用单数。
To talk with him is a great pleasure .和他谈话是一件非常愉快的事情。
Seeing is believing .眼见为实。
三.同步测试
Ⅰ.单项选择
1.Generally ____ , women live longer than men .
A. saying B. to speak C. spoken D. speaking
2.－Do you write to your parents very____ ?
－Not really. Only____.
A. all the year round B. at the end
C. from time to time D. sooner or later
3.－How much exercise is enough for people each day ?
－It’s hard to say, because the health condition is different____ .
A. from time to time B. from person to person
C. from area to area D. a great deal
4.His parents left him ____ money .
A. a great deal of B. a great many
C. a large number of D. thousands of
5.I’m sorry to say that you haven’t ____ full use of your time .
A. settled B. referred C. made D. got
6.They got married and ____ near Paris .
A. settled B. noticed C. hunted D. exploited
7.Guilin is famous ____ its beautiful mountains and lakes .
A. in B. from C. for D. by
8.Babies live ____ milk .
A. for B. on C. by D. from
9.More than one member ____ needed in the match .
A. is B. are C. be D. is to
10.The singer and dancer ____ their party .
A. are to attended B. is attended
C. were to attended D. is to attend
11.I’m sorry I have no money to ____
A. remain B. cost C. take D. spare
12.Each man and woman must try ____ best to help the goverment plant trees.
A. his B. cost C. take D. our
13.－Have all the villagers left yet ?
－No, A woman with her four children in the house .
A. remains B. remain C. is remained D. are remained
14.The officials didn’t see the cloth ____ the thread ____ the cheats .
A. made from, by B. made of ,by C. making from, it D. make of ,by
15.The works of Karl Marx, of course, ____ worth studying .
A. is B. are C. has D. have
16.Whether she’s coming or not ____ too much .
A. matter B. doesn’t , matter C. don’t matter D. matters about
17.I as well as they ____ help you .
A. are ready to B. is ready for C. am ready to D. are ready for
18.One third of the population here ____ workers.
A. is B. are C. has D. be
19.The Chinese ____ a hardworking people .
A. is B. has been C. are D. have been
20.Every picture except those two ____
A. has sold B. have sold C. has been sold D. have been sold
Ⅱ.阅读理解
A
Mrs.Myra Webb, who was told by doctors that she would never hear again, lived for six years in a world of silence .
But yesterday she heard a black bird sing in the garden of her home in Brighton, Sussex.“My hearing is coming back---and it’s wonderful,”she said .
Mrs. Webb, aged 26, is said to be the first woman in Britain to have her hearing brought back by acupuncture(针炙), which is widely practised in China .
After six months’ treatment she can listen to music again, carry on a conversation with the help of a hearing aid ---and has got a job as a typist on the South Eastern Electricity Board.
“It’s nice to hear people talk,”she said in her home in standstead Crescent, Woodingden, Brighton.
Mrs. Webb began to lose her hearing at the age of 12 after a serious illness.“By the age of 20 I had no hearing at all.”
“A friend of mine told me about acupuncture and I went weekly for treatment. One night when I was in the kitchen I heard a faint sound and realized it was my musical kettle boiling. My hearing has slowly improved since.”
Her husband David, a 28-year-old worker, said,“She is excited by the result and is continuing the treatment.”
(From Daily Mail, May 26, )
( )1.This story is mainly about .
A. when Mrs. Byra webb lost her hearing
B. how Chinese acupuncture is used in Britain
C. acupuncture is of great effect
D. how Brs. Byra Webb’s hearing was brought back
( )2.Mrs. Byra Webb most probably lost her hearing in .
A. 1990 B. 1982 C. 1976 D. 1970
( )3.It can be inferred from the text that .
A. Mrs. Mya Webb used to enjoy ease of mind
B. common medicine didn’t work well in improving her hearing
C. Chinese acupuncture has better efficacy(功效)in some diseases
D. Chinese medicine is better than Western medicine
( )4. The underlined phrase“carry on ”in this text can be replaced by .
A. hold B. continue C. manage D. conduct
B
COME TO NEW YORK AND SEE THE WORLD
If you’re looking for the place that has everything, there’s only one place to visit, and that’s New York, It’s whole world in a city .
The World of Theater All of New York is stage（舞台）.And it begins with Broadway. Where else can you find so many hit shows in one place ? Only In New York!
The World of Music Spend an evening with Beethoven at Lincoln Center. Swing to the great jazz of Greenwich Village. Or rock yourself silly at the hottest dance spots(=places) found anywhere.
The World of Art From Fembrandt to Picasso. From Egyptian tombs to Indian teepees（圆锥形帐篷）.Whatever kind of art you like, you like, you’ll find it in New York.
The World of Fine Dining Whether It’s roast Beijing duck（北京烤鸭）in Chinatown, lasagna in Little Italy, or the finest French coq au vin found anywhere, there’s world of great taste waiting for you in New York.
The World of Sights What other city has a Statue of Liberty ? a Rocketfeller Center ?Or a Bronx zoo ? Where else can you take a horse-drawn carriage through Central Park, only in New York!
( )1.Which of the following programmes can a visitor have only in New York ?
A. To enjoy roast Beijing duck..
B. To taste the finest French coq au vin.
C. To spend an evening with Beethoven.
D. To see the Statue of Liberty.
( )2.From the text we know that“Rembrandt”is most likely the name of a famous .
A. singer B. painting C. play D. painter
( )3.What the writer really wanted to do is to .
A. try to persuade readers to pay a visit to New York
B. give readers some information about New York.
C. supply readers some wonderful programmes in New York
D. help readers to get a better understanding of New York
( )4. The above passage may be taken from .
A. a guidebook for foreign travellers
B. a handbook for English learners
C. a pocketbook for visiting businessmen
D. a storybook for native readers
四.参考答案
Ⅰ.单项选择
1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. B 9. A 10 D 11. D 12. A 13. A 14. B 15. A 16. B 17. C 18. B
19. C 20. C
Ⅱ.阅读理解
A. 1. D 2. A 3. C 4. A B. 1.D 2.D 3.A 4.A
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit6.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第六单元
关键词
内容
一、教学目的和要求：
⒈ 单词和词组：
shape ring(n.) collection bank material hide hand out L.22四会
here and there look round
envelope sooner or later pick up pack packs of L.23
cheaply
cock shame coin L.21三会
silver penny(pl. pence) mine(n.) possibly whenever L.22
trade whatever afford L.23
seashell L.22二会
⒉ 日常交际用语
复习第一至第五单元出现过的日常交际用语。
⒊ 语法：
复习第一至第五单元学习过的语法项目。
二、重点和难点：
L.21
⒈I’m afraid I don’t have it any more. 恐怕我再也没有了。
句子的not any more (no more) 意为“不再”，“再也不”。
在谈数量或程度时，可用no more；说时间时则用not any more。例如：
There is no more bread. 没有面包了。（指数量）
He is no more genius than I am. 他和我都不是天才。（指难度）
He doesn’t live here any more. 他不住在这儿了。（指时间）
Let him go alone. He isn’t a child any more. 让他一个人去吧。他不再是小孩子了。
⒉What a shame ! (what a pity!) 太遗憾了！真不巧！多可惜啊！
这是两个日常交际用语中表示遗憾的句子。shame可作“可惋惜之事”解，无复数形式，前面常用不定冠词a。例如：
You didn’t go to her birthday party. What a shame ! 真遗憾，你没有去参加她的生日聚会。
She can’t join us in the travel. What s shame ! /What a pity!
她不能参加我的旅行了，真是太遗憾了！
在本课中还出现了这样一个句子：It’s a pity I didn’t think of it earlier. 很遗憾我没有早点想起这件事。
这是由形式主语it引导的表示遗憾的用语，其句型结构是：It is a pity+that clause，由that引导的主语从句表示遗憾的具体内容，而that这一连词常可省略。例如：
She can’t join us in the travel. What a pity! 也可以这样表示：
It’s a pity (that) she can’t join us in the travel. 很遗憾她不能参加我们的旅行了。
L.22
⒈Later, another type of coin was used , with holes in it, and these were used for the next 2,000 years, that is, from 221 BC until 1916. 后来，使用一种中间有孔的硬币，这种硬币以后用了2,0，即从公元前2开始到19为止。
a)句中的with holes in it是with的一个复合结构，在句中作定语，其结构是with+n.+介词短语，这时它相当一个定语从句（…which has holes in it），对先行词coin作补充说明。例如：
I don’t know how to operate this new type of machine, with lots of meters on it. 我不知道如何操纵这种新型机器，上面有许多仪表。
He used to live with his grandparents in a large house, with trees round it. 他曾和他的祖父母住在一座大房子里，四周皆是树木。
另外，with的这种复合结构也可以用作方式状语。例如：
We sat on the ground, with our backs to the wall. 我们坐在地上，面靠着墙。
The wife came down the stairs, with her son in her arms. 妻子从楼上下来，怀中抱着她的儿子。
b)句中的that is，作插入语用，对上文进行补充说明。这一插入语的前后通常用逗号同句子的其他部分分开。意思是“这就是说”，“也就是”。例如：
Bruce lived in China for about two years, that is, from 1995 to . 布鲁斯在中国住居约两年，即从1995年到。
She visited Shenzhen three years ago, that is, in 1996. 她三年前去过深圳，也就是说是在的时候。
⒉coins may be of different sizes, weights, shapes, and of different metals.
(=coins may be different in size, weight and shape, and they may be made of different metals.)硬币可能大小、轻重、形状不同，铸造的金属可能不一样。
句中的of所引起的短语of different sizes, weights, shapes以及of different metals都用作表语，表示主语coins的特征。例如：
The method is of great importance (=The method is very important. )这方法很重要。
Your advice is of great help. (=your advice is helpful.) 你的忠告很有帮助。
The professor’s suggestions are of much value. (=The professor’s suggestions are very valuable.) 教授的建议是很宝贵的。
但在口语中，of有时可以省去，特别是在of短语之后还有修辞语的时候。例如：
The girls are almost (of) the same height. 这些姑娘们差不多一般高。
⒊The earliest coins in the west were made of gold mixed with silver. 西方最早的硬币是用金和银的合金制成的。
句中的mixed with silver是过去分词短词，作定语用，修辞gold，作定词用的过去时分词短词通常置于它所修饰的名词之后，大体相当于一个定语从句。例如：
The building built last year (which was built last year ) is now a hospital. 去年建的大楼现在是家医院。
The young girl dressed in red (who is dressed in red) is a dancer.
穿红衣服的那位年轻的姑娘是舞蹈演员。
需要注意的是：当单个的过去分词作定语时，通常放在被修饰的名词前面。例如：
Who is your most respected teacher ? Mr Li is。谁是你的最尊敬的老师？李先生。
The broken window has been repaired. 那扇坏窗子已经修好了。
⒋The new Chinese panda coin is made of 99.99% gold. 新的中国熊猫硬币的含金量为99.99%。
a)句中的be made of短语意为“由……制造”。用这一结构时，主要是指成品中可以看出原材料，其制作过程中仅发生了物理变化。例如：
The desks and chairs are made of wood. 课桌和椅子是用木头制造的。
There wine bottles are made of glass. 这些酒瓶是用玻璃做的。
但有些制品制成后，已看不出原材料，其制作过程发生了化学变化，这时则由短语be made from表示。例如：
Gas is made from coal. 煤气由煤制成。
This kind of wine is made from grape. 这种酒是葡萄做的。
b)99.99%读作ninety─nine, point ninety─nine percent, 拼写时percent也可以分开写成per cent.
⒌It contained 54, 951 coins dating from the years 260-275 A.D. 那一堆硬币共有54,951枚，制币时间是公元260年至275年之间。
a)句中的it指上文提到的the collection of coins found in England in 1978.
b)dating from短语在句中作定语，相当于一个定语从句……which dated from the years…，修饰先行词coins, date在这里是不及物动词，意思是“起始”，“兴起于……”，常与介词from一起构成短语date from, 作“始于……”时期（=come into being or come from a centain time.）。例如：
This castle dates from the 14th century. 这座城堡建于14世纪。
The Great Wall dates from the third century BC. 长城始建于公元前三世纪。
date作名词时，意思为“日期”，“日子”。例如：
Today’s date is the 23rd of October. 今天是10月23日。
Has the date of the meeting been fixed? 开会的日期定下来了吗？
⒍It is known that thousands of Chinese worked in the gold mines in the late 19th century. 众所周知，在十九世纪末成千上万的中国工人在金矿里干活。
a)It is known that…是一固定句型，其中it是形式主语，that引导的句子是真正的主语类似这样的结构还有：It is reported that…, it is announced that…, It is said that…。例如：
It is reported that the old building burned down last week dated from the early 187os.据报道，上周烧毁的那座古代的建筑物始建于十九世纪初。
It is said that she started to learn to swim in her late fifties.据说她在她近六十岁时开始学游泳的。
b)句中的late为形容词，表示“后期”、“末期”，而early则表示“早期”、“初期”。例如在上面的二个句子中分别出现了the early 187os十九世纪初和in her late fifties在她近六十岁时。
⒎It is possible that one of them kept a kind of bank where the workers could keep their money safe.其中有一个人可能开了一个钱庄，工人们可以把钱安全地存放在那里。
a)这是一个由形成主语it引导的句子，其真正的主语是that引导的句子，其结构是It It is+adj.+that clause. 例如：
It is possible that it will rain tomorrow.明天可能会下雨。
It is important that every student follows the teacher’s advice. 每个学生都应听从老师的忠告，这一点很重要。
另外，要注意possible, probable和likely的区别：possible表示客观上潜在的可能性；probable表示有几分根据的推测；而likely则表示有充分根据的推测。
b)句中的keep a bank意思是“开办银行”。这里keep是及物动词，作“经营”、“养活”、“管理”解，后跟名词作宾语。例如：
My father keeps a shop in a small village. 我父亲在一个小村子里开了家商店。
The old woman has a young girl to keep her house. 这位老妇人雇佣了一位年轻的姑娘替她管家。
He has to work very hard to keep the family. 为了养家糊口他得努力工作。
c)本句中的keep the money safe这一结构中，keep也是及物动词，但意为“保持（某种状况）”，其后跟的是带形容词的复合结构：keep+n.+adj.，例如：
We should keep our classroom clean and tidy. 我们应该保持教室的整洁。
Put the food into the refrigerator to keep it cool, or it will go bad. 把这些食物放在冰箱里以便冷藏，否则会变坏的。
L.23
⒈At the beginning, collect as many stamps as you can. 首先，尽可能多地收集邮票。
a)at the beginning意为“首先”、“起初”类似的短语还有in the beginning, at first 其反义词组是in the end, at last或副词finally.
b)as… as one can意为“尽力”、“尽……可能”，与as…as possible意思相同。例如：
Please start as early as you can (=Please start as early as possible.)请尽早出发。
We should work as hard as we can.(=we should work as hard as possible.)我们应尽力工作。
除了在as…as之间加副词外，也可加“形容词+名词”词组。例如：
You’d better make as many friends as you can while at school. 你最好是在学校广交朋友。
Try to make as few mistakes as you can (possible) 尽量少犯错误。
⒉The ones which you decide not to keep can be traded with other people. 那些你决定不保留的邮票可以同其他人交换。
句中的trade为动词，意思为“做生意”、“交易”、“互易”。与介词with连用，构成短语动词trade with sb.，作“与（某人）作买卖”、“同（某人）交换”解。例如：
He refused to trade with that company again. 他再一次地拒绝了与那家公司做生意。
Stamp collectors often trade stamps with each other. 集邮者经常相互交换邮票。
如果说表达“用……同……进行交换”时，则用短语trade for (exchange sth. for sth.)，例如：
I traded my watch for a bike. 我用我的手表换了一辆自行车。
Would you like to trade this book for a pen? 你愿意用一本书换一支钢笔吗？
⒊Sooner or later you’ll decide that you want to collect a certain kind of stamp. 迟早你会决定收集一种邮票。
句中的固定词sooner or later作“迟早”、“总有一天”解，与at some time, some day同义。例如：
Sooner or later she was going to awake. 她迟早会觉醒的。
The boy will, sooner or later, tell his father all about the matter. 这个男孩迟早会把这事的全部经过告诉他父亲的。
⒋Go to stamp sales and buy whatever you can afford. 到邮票销售点去，把你能够买得起的邮票买下来。
a)句中的stamp sales (the place where stamps are sold)意思是邮票销售部，邮票发售点。sale的复数形式常用来作定语，构成合成词。例如：
a sales talk销售谈判；salesgirl /salesman / saleswoman售货员，推销员。
b)句中的whatever是连接代词，相当于anything that，作“凡是……的”、“所……的东西”，引导名词性从句。本句中的whatever you can afford就是作及物动词buy的宾词。例如：
I will do whatever you wish. 我将为你做任何事情。
You can eat whatever you like. 你愿意吃什么就吃什么。
此外，whatever还可以引导主语从句。例如：
Whatever I have is yours. 我的东西都是你的。
whatever还可以用来引导状语从句，表示让步，作“无论什么”解。
Keep calm, whatever happens. 不论出什么事都要保持镇定。
Whatever you do, do your best. 无论你干什么，都要尽最大努力。
c)句中的afford一词是动词，作“花得起”、“买得起”解，表示“有经济条件做某事”这一词常和can这类词连用。但同时也表示“为（某目的）有足够的钱、时间、地方等。”例如：
The house is too expensive. We can’t afford it. 这座房子太贵了，我们买不起。
They walked here because they couldn’t afford a taxi. 他们因坐不起出租车而是步行来这里的。
I’d like to go on holiday but I can’t afford the time. 我想去度假但抽不出时间来。
另外，afford一词还有“给予某物”、“供给某物”的意思。例如：
The tree afforded us welcome shade. 这棵大树下好乘凉。
Television affords pleasure to people. 电视给人们带来乐趣。
三、同步测试：
I. 选择最佳答案：
⒈Your name is John. The phone rings so you pick it up and say:
A. John speaking B. hello
C. Can I help you ? D. John here. Who do you want to speak to?
⒉You answer the phone. Someone wants to speak to your father, who is at home . You say.
A. Please don’t go away B. Hold on, please.
C. Wait a minute. D. Please wait here.
⒊When you answer the phone, you find that the caller has dialed the wrong number. He says that he is very sorry. You reply:
A. Goodbye. B. Not at all
C. Please don’t do it again. D. Please be more careful
⒋She gathered a lot of coins from different countries.选择适当的答案替换划线部分：
A. bought B. received C. accepted D. collected
⒌The man shouted in a _______ voice and the girl was very _______.
A. frightening, frightening B. frightening, frightened
C. frightened, frightened D. frightened, frightening
⒍Hibernation is more than sleep.选择适当的答案替换划线部分：
A. much more B. not only C. less than D. fast
⒎The watch is ______ at over a thousand yuan, so I can’t _____ it.
A. value, waste B. worth, spend C. price, cost D. valued, afford
⒏The two girls are ______.
A. the same height and age B. of the same height and age
C. the same high and age D. of the same high and age
⒐Please choose _______ you like.
A. whenever B. whatever C. anything which D. it
⒑The park near my house is getting dirtier and dirtier. Rubbish can be seen ______.
A. here and there B. far and wide
C. near and far D all where.
⒒It is ______ for you to do such a thing in public.
A. shameful B. shame C. a shame D. shamed
⒓I’ll go with you ______ you are ready.
A. whatever B. whenever C. wherever D. whoever
⒔This is one of the questions ______ at the meeting last week.
A. being discussed B. discussing C. to be discussed D. discussed
⒕________ plastics, the machine is light in weight.
A. Made of B. Marking of C. To made of D. Having made of
⒖The question ______ now is ______ great impartance.
A. is discussed, of B. discussed, in
C. to be discussed, about D. being discussed, of
⒗All the students found _______ to work out the difficult physics problem.
A. it is impossible B. it impossible C. that impossible D. that is impossible
⒘The students were kept busy ______ the coming exem.
A. preparing with B. preparing C. for preparing D. prepared
⒙______ wants to go to the concert must sign here.
A. Who B. Those who C. Anyone D.Whoever
⒚下面的句子中只有一句无语法错误，请找出来。
A. He is such good a teacher that I have ever seen.
B. He is so a good teacher that we all love him.
C. He is so excellent a student that he is known to all in our school.
D. We all love him because he is such good a teacher.
⒛Would you please ______ from smoking while the lecture is in progress?
A. avoid B. stop C. cease D. keep yourself
II.阅读下面短文，并在空白处填入一个语法及意义都正确的词，每空一词：
In Singapore, people from all walks of life (1) close to one (2) . For (3) , near where I live people do a variety of jobs, ranging from hawkers (小贩) (4) bank managers . Mr Hock is a hawker, who has to visit the market every morning to buy food for his stall. This quite unusual among Singaporeans as buying from the market is (5) done by women. Next (6) to us, your immediate neighbour, Mr Kim, works during the day (7) a clerk in the city, but when evening comes, unlike other men. (8) go home to eat and relax by “putting their legs up”, he has a second job on the stock exchange. (9) it is day-time in New York, dealers are obliged to sit up all night to follow the monements of the market. And yet the local trader and the financier live (10) 100 meties of each other.
III.改错
One watches TV often feels that whatever
happened in the film could well happen to them . Jane
had been enjoying a spy film in which a young girl had followed and
murdered. Now she was walking to the station, feel a little
frigtened. She took the train back to the center of the city where
there were a lot of people, so she felt much safe. She
thought of nothing until she found a man nearby staring at him. Feeling
very uncomfortable, she got out of the train and went to the bus
step. After getting off, she heard footsleps behind her but dare not turn
round before she felt a hand on her shoulder and heard a pleasantly voice:
“I’d apologize whether I frightened you. I’m your new neighbour.
I thought I recognized you in the train, but I was not so sure.” 1.________
2.________
3.________
4.________
5.________
6.________
7.________
8.________
9.________
10._______
参考答案：
I.1─5DBCDB 6─10BDBBA 11─15CBDAD 16─20BBDCD
II.⒈live；⒉another；⒊example；⒋to；⒌always；⒍door；⒎as；⒏who；⒐when；
⒑about
III.⒈One后加who；⒉them him / himself；⒊had后加been；⒋feel feeling；⒌ ；
⒍safe safer；⒎him her；⒏dare dared；⒐pleasantly pleasant；⒑whether if
How to grow up healthily As we know, cellphones and computers are common in our daily life. However, children nowadays depend much on them, which does great harm to their In my opinion, the major task for children is to learn various knowledge. Therefore, they should Besides, they should spare more time to take exercise. If so, they The last but not least, children should learn to communicate with others. They can have a heart-to-heart conversation with their parents and teachers if they have some problems hard to solve. As they have more experience in life, they can give children plenty of instructions.
高二英语第一单元作文
As is known to us all, teachers play an important role in our process of growing up. As far as I am concerned, an ideal teacher should be responsible, impartial and wise.
First of all, a qualified teacher should be responsible. For one thing, he should try his best to make his class interesting and try to understand what his students need. For another, he needs to keep enthusiastic with his job of spread knowledge all the time and act as an example for others everywhere he goes to.
Second, be impartial is another requirement. As a teacher, he should not divide students into good ones and bad ones since each student has unique characteristic and value. Therefore, no matter what kind of students he encounters, he should treat them impartially, without any bias.
Finally, my ideal teacher is one who does not only teach students his specialized knowledge but also can give students some guidance about life and about how to act as human beings. This guidance has a great effect on students’ outlook on life and sense of worth.
To sum up, an ideal teacher should not only pay attention to the achievements his students get, but also put emphasis on developing students’ correct views on life and sense of worth.
Miss Hou is my English teacher, she is 28, we all like her. My English is really bad at first, I am afraid of having Miss Hou’s class, when she finds this, she doesn’t blame me, she tells me that the only way I can learn English well is to fall in love with English, she asks me to watch English movie, it works. Miss Hou is my favorite teacher.
If ask me who my favorite teacher is, I will no doubt answer you that Miss Hou is my favorite teacher. She is an English teacher, she is kind to everyone, she is not like other teachers who are so strict to students. As Miss Hou is so popular among students, students learn English with high enthusiasm, that is what they return to her. Miss Hou is a good teacher.
I remember the first time I see Miss Hou, she walks in class, and then talks with students about small things. She doesn’t talk about English in the first class, everyone feels Miss Hou is so amiable, we like her so much. Miss Hou is good at teaching us, she explain the question very patiently, when we understand, she will be move to the next topic, Miss Hou is a good teacher.
教学准备
教学目标
1. Target Language 目标语言
重点词汇
sightseeing, available, delight, tower, royal, uniform, splendid, statue, communism, thrill, pot, unfair, smart, suggestion, tense, consistent, error
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable the students to write a short passage about a place of interest they have visited.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Help the students learn how to describe one of the places of interest they have visited.
教学重难点
How to describe a famous building or a place of interest.
教学过程
Step Ⅰ Revision and Lead-in
Ask some students to read their work to the class.
T: As we know, advertising is very important in the business world. And nowadays, more and more ads for tourism appear on televisions, in the streets, on the buses, etc. Also, an appealing poster for a scenic spot is very important to draw visitors. So it should be written in an exciting way. In the last period, you were asked to write a poster to encourage people to visit. Now who’d like to share your work?
A sample version:
Why not visit “the Oriental Hawaii”?
Hainan Island is the second largest island in China, covering an area of 33,920 square kilometers with a history of over 6,000 years. It lies in the south of China. The Qiongzhou Strait separates the Hainan Island from the mainland. Its neighboring countries are Philippines towards the east, Malaysia and Brunei towards the south, Indonesia towards the southwest, and Vietnam towards the west. Hainan Island has a population of 7.11 million, which consists of 10 nationalities. The people there make a living by growing rice, fishing, and so on. The climate is mild all year round. Hainan is called “the Oriental Hawaii”. Every year thousands of travelers visit the island. Among the famous places of interest are Yalong Bay (No.1 in the world), Tianya-Haijiao (Corner of the Earth), Dadong Sea, Luhuitou (Turn-round Deer), Sanya Bay, Xiao Tongtian, Folk Village, etc.
Step Ⅱ Writing
Task 1: Ask the students to write a tour plan.
T: Suppose a group of foreign students are visiting our country. They will stay here for two weeks. At present they are in Shanghai. Their plan is to see at least three cities and three major scenic spots. Now please make a two-week plan for their tour. You must make sure that they can make full use of their time. Tell them what places they will see and where the various places are.
A sample tour plan:
Day 1: You will arrive in Shanghai, the city of China of 21st century. Shanghai is on the Huangpu River and also on the east coast, and has a population of more than 16 million. It is China’s most modernized city. You will have three days in Shanghai, during which time you will visit many famous scenic spots. The bund is a scenic walk along the river, and there are some temples in and around the city.
Day 4: You will travel a few kilometers by bus south-west to Hangzhou. There is a beautiful lake on the west of the city, and within a few kilometers of the city is a famous Buddhist Temple. You will have two days and two nights in Hangzhou.
Day 6: You will leave Hangzhou early in the morning for Guilin, just a short flight west of Hangzhou. You will see the Elephant Rock, in the center of the city, and then go on a boat on the beautiful Lijiang River to see the famous hills and cliffs. You will spend two days there.
Day 8: From Lijiang we fly to Xi’an, which is a few hundred kilometers away from the coast. Not far from the city you will see the world-famous Terra Cotta Warriors, and just beyond the south gate to the city is the Wild Goose Pagoda. There are some other historical attractions in Xi’an as well. You’ll have three days there.
Day 11: We leave early for the capital, Beijing, which is northeast of Xi’an. In the north of the city is the Great Wall. The Palace Museum and Tian An Men Square are in the center of the city, and the Summer Palace is a short drive to the northwest. We’ll spend two days in Beijing.
Day 14: We leave at noon for our flight south to Shanghai, then make our way home.
Task 2: Ask the students to write a complaint letter. T: When you have some problems or are not satisfied with something, you can write a complaint letter to the people who are responsible for it. Next please write a complaint letter to complain the problems or anything unsatisfactory at school or at home. Before your writing, please read the following tips carefully.
Show the following.
How to Write A Complaint Letter
· Include your name, address, home and work phone numbers.
· Type your letter if possible. If it is handwritten, make sure it is neat and easy to read.
· Make your letter brief and to the point. Include all important facts and any information you can give.
· State exactly what you want done about the problem and how long you are willing to wait to get it resolved. Be reasonable.
· Include all documents regarding your problem. Be sure to send COPIES, not originals.
· Avoid writing an angry, sarcastic, or threatening letter. The person reading your letter probably was not responsible for your problem but may be very helpful in resolving it.
· Keep a copy of the letter for your records.
Then ask the students to make a list of things that they feel are important.
T: Think of anything at school or at home that you feel very strong about. Make a list and choose the one you think is the most serious and write a letter to draw attention.
A sample list of things:
1. I have to wait too long a time being served in the canteen.
2. Several of our teachers speak in a too low voice and the students who sit behind can’t hear clearly. 3. My parents often read my diary without my permission.
4. The school demands us to wear the ugly school uniform.
The most serious one is the first one in the list.
A sample letter:
Dear Mr. Sam,
I have enjoyed eating at your restaurant the last several years. In my opinion, your hamburgers are the best in our town. I tell my friends. However, last Friday evening, I waited in a line ten people deep while we watched a lone waitress going back and forth with light running steps trying to serve too many tables. After 15 minutes and not getting seated, I decided to leave and went to another restaurant. Why not hire a second waiter or waitress? And why not enlarge your restaurant? You have available space to the east. I wish you the best with your restaurant, and I hope you resolve the problems we met.
Sincerely,
Harlan
Step Ⅲ Homework
Ask the students to do the task in PROJECT on page 54.
高二英语第三单元教案
高二英语第三单元教案 更多好的英语学习教案，尽在《战胜英语90天》，在《战胜英语90天》中不仅可以找到这些教案，并且能帮助我们运用自如，这也是《战胜英语90天》倍受中国人推崇的原因 ，它融合了中国人和外国人的双重思维模式，用母语的学习方式，采用沉浸式学习乐趣无穷，营造良好的学习环境，让大家边学习边交流，实践性特别强，轻轻松松张口说英语。像母语一样自然流畅！这样来达到了90天轻松搞定英语单词，英语语法，英语音标，英语阅读，英语听力，英语口语，英语写作，英语翻译也就不足为奇了。 他们的网址是www.eshop880.com，或者在百度都《战胜英语90天》都可以找到 科目 英语 年级 高二 文件 high2 unit3.3.doc 标题 Mainly Revision 章节 第三单元 关键词 内容一、教法建议 【抛砖引玉】 在不同的国家和地区，表达同一概念，体态语中的手势可能不同，相同的手势却表达不同的概念。例如：表达数字“1”的概念时，我们习惯伸出食指，而瑞士人则伸出拇指；当中国人伸出拇指时绝对不会表示“1”的意思，而是“好”的意思。据说由于手势语的不同，不但产生很多误会，还曾经引起过一些灾难。有一次，一些欧洲海员在地中海游水作乐时不知不觉地游到了海防基地，卫兵见到后向他们大声喊叫，并作出“过来”的手势。此时，海员们意识到离海防工事太近了，但是他们误将卫兵的手势理解为“走开”，于是就向远处游去。警惕的卫兵立即开枪打死了这些不幸者。 在西方国家，有一些特别的、人们都遵循的规矩。不敲门是不能打开关闭的门的；不受邀请是不能进入私人住宅的，当然你自己的住宅除外。在收到礼物时，西方人总是教孩子们说“谢谢”。对于西方人来说，吃饭出声音被视为是不礼貌的，然而在有些国家，这是合适地表达你爱吃主人给你的食物。看来，假如你不知道其它国家的这些规矩，你就会犯可笑的错误。 通过学习本单元，同学们将了解到一些有关身势语的.知识，这在跨国语言文化间的交际中具有十分重要的作用。 【指点迷津】 A.单元重点新词读音归类 1.[? ]manage handshake Arab manner 2.[ai]type dining-room 3.[d ]gesture juice 4.[ ]composition nod 5.[u:]communicate juice 6.[ei]handshake wave Asian communicate 7.[i:]agreement disagreement 8.[i]manage composition kiss distance fist 9. [ n]composition Asian 10.[ ]handshake Asian 11.[ ]composition agreement disagreement Arab custom manner distance communicate comfortable B.单元重点新词透视 1.manage (1)作及物动词用是“管理、经营；安排，运用；控制”。如： She has managed the company for many years and managed it very well . 她管理这家公司已经很多年了，而且管理得非常好。 Mike knows how to manage wife when she’s angry . 当他妻子生气时，迈克知道怎样对付。 (2)其后接不定式，作“设法做到……”（含成功的做某事）。如： We managed to finish the hard work in time . 我们设法及时完成了那项重活。 测试要点： (1)manage与try的辨异 manage常指“想方设法而成功地做成某事”，强调结果。try常指“试图或努力做某事，成功与否不清楚”。如： He manageed to get the housework done with very little help .在没有多少帮助的情况下，他把家务活干完了。 He tried to get the housework done with very little help .他企图在没有多少帮助的情况下，把家务活干完。 (2)在交际英语中常用I can manage to / I can manage . 2.wave (1)作可数名词是“波，波浪，波涛，光或者声的波”。如：The waves rolled on .波涛滚滚。sound waves声波。long / short waves长 / 短波。 (2)作及物或者不及物动词是“波动，漂动，挥手”。如：The flags waved in the winds .旗帜迎风飘扬。 (3)指“情绪的波动，人群的潮涌”。如：Waves of strikes hit the country .罢工的浪潮冲击着这个国家。 测试要点： wave sb sth = wave sth to sb向某人挥手…… She waved me a greeting . = She waved a greeting to me .她向我挥手致意。 He waved good-by to us .他向我们挥手告别。 3.agreement同意、一致 测试要点： (1)in agreement表示同意。如：She nodded her head in agreement . 她点头表示同意。 (2)in agreement with和…一致。如：Her opinion is in agreement with mine .她的意见和我的意见一致。 (3)agreement的反义词是disagreement。express one’s disagreement表示某人的不同意见。 4.kiss可作名词、及物动词和不及物动词。意思是“吻，亲吻，用吻表达；轻拂” The two balls kissed .两球轻轻相碰。 A soft breeze kissed her face . 轻风拂过她的脸。 测试要点： (1)kiss sb + on + the + check吻某人的脸蛋 (2)kiss sb goodbye = kiss goodbye to sb向某人吻别，kiss hello to sb向某人问好 (3)give sb a kiss吻某人一下 (4)习语：kiss the dust / ground承认彻底失败，kiss of life人工呼吸 5.custom习惯，习俗，风俗 Their customs and habits are different from ours .他们的风俗习惯与我们的不同。 测试要点： (1)区别custom与habit custom主要是群体性的不断演变而成的习惯，代表一个国家或者地区的传统，即“习俗、风俗”。habit是指一个动作反复发生，习惯成自然。如： Social customs are greatly different from country to country .各个国家的社会风俗习惯很不相同。 Biting his fingers is his habit .咬手指是他的习惯。 (2)customs常作“关税”，the Customs海关。 6.proud骄傲的；自豪的。该词的名词形式为pride . 测试要点： (1)be proud of对……骄傲 We are proud of our great motherland . 我们为我们伟大的祖国骄傲。 (2)be proud to do干……骄傲 She is proud to have taken part in the Asian Games .她为能参加了亚运会而自豪。 (3)feel proud that为……自豪 Our football team feels proud that it has won every match this year .我们的足球队今年每次比赛都赢了，这使全队都感到骄傲。 (4)take (a) pride in以……自豪，对……得意 He takes pride in his success .= He is proud of his success . (5)with pride = proudly骄傲地，自豪地 (6)谚语：Pride will have a fall .= Pride goes before a fall . 骄者必败。 7.manner方式；态度；举止。manners礼貌 测试要点： (1)用作单数是“方式，方法，风格，手法”。如：I love duck cooked in Chinese manner / way .我爱吃中国烧法的鸭子。I don’t like his manner of speaking .我不喜欢他的说话方式。 (2)with manners有礼貌，without manners没礼貌 (3)have good manners有礼貌，have no manners没礼貌 (4)区别下列表达“方法”的名词，注意各自的介词搭配：manner , way , means , method manner指“行为的特殊方式或独特的个人方法”。in the Western manner以西方式的，in a manner = in a way在一定程度上 way常指“一般方式，方法”。in this way用这种方法 means多指抽象或概括性意义的“手段，方法”。by this means有这种方法 method着重为达到目的或解决问题而采取的有系统、有步骤的方法，着重方法的准确有效。with this method用这种方法 8.distance距离 测试要点： (1)at a distance稍远一点，at a distance of two miles在2英里的距离处，in the distance在远方。如：This oil-painting looks beautiful at a distance .这幅油画站稍远一点看很好看。 In the dark night , we could a light in the distance at sea .在漆黑的夜晚，我们在海上能看到远处的灯光。 (2)distance的形容词是distant (3)What is the distance from…to …?哪离哪有多远？ (4)make a long distance call打长途电话 C.单元重点词组扫瞄 1.It is a pleasure to do …很高兴地干…… 2.Would you like me to do…?你想让我干……？ 3.I can manage it myself .我自己能解决。 4.help sb with cooking a meal帮某人做饭 5.show sb to the dining room领……去餐厅= lead sb to the dining-room 6.do the shooping购物，买东西 7.make oneself understood让别人理解自己 make oneself +过去分词“让自己被明白”make sb do让某人干…… 8.by words（抽象的）凭借语言，in words口头上，with words用具体的语言，in deeds行动上 9.not just不只是 You can go there not just by bus , but by train .到那里不仅可以坐汽车，还可以坐火车。 10.send messages to sb向某人传递信息 With the help of satellites, we can send messages to other parts of the world .借助卫星，我们可以向世界其它地区传递信息。 11.accept A as B认为 / 承认A是B The police accepted the story as true .警方认为这事是真的。 These gestures are accepted both by Chinese and English speakers as having the same meaning .这些手势和姿态对说汉语的人和说英语的人都是一样的意思。 12.take…for example以……为榜样，take…as an example以……为榜样 Take water for example , it is made up of two gases──hydrogen and oxygen .以水为例，它是由氢和氧两种气体组成的。 Let’s take Lei Feng as a good example for all of us to follow .让我们把雷锋当作我们大家学习的好榜样。 13.shake hands握手，shake hands with sb = shake sb by the hand和高二英语第一单元测试题
第一部分 听力(共两节，30分)
第一节(共5小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
1．What will the man have for breakfast?
A．Eggs. B．Bread. C．Coffee.
2．Why does the man visit the woman?
A．To say sorry to the woman.
B．To borrow some milk.
C．To help cook the meal.
3．What is the man doing?
A．Asking the way.
B．Helping the woman.
C．Working in an office.
4．What is the time now?
A．4∶45. B．5∶00. C．5∶30.
5．What does the man offer to do?
A．Drive for the woman.
B．Find a parking lot.
C．Carry the boxes for the woman.
第二节(共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分)
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至7题。
6．Which of the following does the man like?
A．Fish. B．Tea. C．Coffee.
7．What is the woman’s attitude towards the man?
A．Cold. B．Friendly. C．Careful.
听第7段材料，回答第8至10题。
8．What are the speakers talking about?
A．A high school.
B．A French teacher.
C．A teaching post.
9．What can we know about the man?
A．He can speak French.
B．He can speak Chinese.
C．He can’t work 35 hours a week.
10．What is the probable relationship between the speakers?
A．Host and guest.
B．Friends.
C．Teacher and student.
听第8段材料，回答第11至13题。
11．What will the woman do on Saturday morning?
A．Walk the dog.
B．Help clean the house.
C．See a film.
12．Where will the woman have to go at 12∶00?
A．To the dentist’s.
B．To her school.
C．To the science museum.
13．What time will the woman probably go to Julie’s?
A．At 12∶30 p．m..
B．At 1∶00 p．m..
C．At 2∶00 p．m..
听第9段材料，回答第14至17题。
14．What kind of food will the speakers eat?
A．American food.
B．Indian food.
C．Chinese food.
15．What is true about the Easter Palace?
A．It is very good.
B．It is very expensive.
C．It is an Indian restaurant.
16．When will the speakers meet?
A．On Saturday. B．On Friday. C．On Sunday.
17．What can we learn from the conversation?
A．The speakers will meet before 7.
B．The speakers will meet at the man’s home.
C．The woman doesn’t know how to order Chinese food.
听第10段材料，回答第18至20题。
18．When will the manager interview Chen Hua?
A．On May 18. B．On May 8. C．On May 28.
19．What will Chen Hua have to do a week later?
A．Turn in a work plan.
B．Take a medical examination.
C．Begin to work in the company.
20．Who is Mary Walter probably?
A．A doctor.
B．A company manager.
C．A secretary.
听力材料：
(Text 1)
W：Good morning，dear.Do you want eggs for breakfast?
M：No，thanks.I’m late.Just some coffee，please.
(Text 2)
(There is a knock at the door.)
W：Who is it?
M：It’s me，Tom.Sorry to trouble you，Tracy.But I just ran out of milk.Could you lend me some?
W：Yeah，no problem.Come in.Here you are.
(Text 3)
M：Excuse me，could you tell me where the secretary’s office is，please?
W：Yes.It’s up the stairs，straight to the end of the passage and there you are.
M：Thank you.
(Text 4)
W：What time is it?
M：It’s a quarter to five.
W：Aren’t we supposed to be at Jim’s house by five o’clock?
M：Five or five thirty.He said it didn’t make any difference.
(Text 5)
M：Can I help you with those boxes?
W：Huh？Why，yes.That’s very kind of you.
M：No trouble at all.Where’s your car?
W：Right over there.The white one.
(Text 6)
W：You’ll be having meals with us.Is there any type of food that you don’t like?
M：Er，not really.The only thing is that I’m not very keen on fish.
W：Not very keen on fish?
M：No.
W：Oh，well，that’s not much of a problem.
M：Er，nothing else.Oh，tea.I never drink tea.
W：You never drink tea?
M：I usually have coffee.
W：Well，we usually have tea all the time.
M：Oh，dear.
W：But that’s not a problem，either.We’ll make you coffee.
(Text 7)
W：Er，well，I think there’s a job that could well interest you.
M：Really?
W：Yeah.It’s at a high school in the north of London.
M：Oh，yes.
W：Yeah.They’re looking for a French teacher.
M：Oh，that sounds very interesting.How much do they pay?
W：Well，I seem to remember they mentioned something in the area of 65,000 a year.
M：Uhhuh.
W：And，well，I think the job，you know，requires the normal teaching hours.I suppose you’d have a 35hour week.
M：Oh，really？When does the job start?
W：Er，well，you know，at the beginning of September.
(Text 8)
M：So，Susan，do you have anything planned for this Saturday?
W：Uh，I’m kind of busy.Why do you ask?
M：Oh，I was wondering if you like to get together and do something，like seeing a movie or taking a walk down by the lake.
W：I’d love to，but I’m really going to be busy all day on Saturday.
M：What do you have to do on that day?
W：First，my mum will ask me to help clean the house in the morning，and then I have a dentist appointment at 12∶00 o’clock.I can’t miss that because I’ve canceled twice before.
M：Well，what about after that?
W：Well，I’m going to be running around all day.Julie asked me to her house at 1∶30 to help her with her science project.But I’m afraid I’ll be half an hour late.
M：Oh，you’re always so busy.When can you be free，Susan?
W：Hardly ever，my mum always tries to come up with something for me to do.
(Text 9)
W：Why don’t we go out for dinner sometime this week?
M：That’d be nice.I haven’t been to a restaurant for ages.Do you have any place in mind?
W：Not really.Let’s think.How about Indian food?
M：Mm，that would be okay.It can be a bit hot，though.
W：Yeah，that’s true.Then how about Chinese food?
M：I love Chinese food.But I’m never sure what to order!
W：Well，why don’t we try that Chinese restaurant on Main Street？Have you ever eaten there?
M：You mean the Easter Palace？Is that the one?
W：That’s right.
M：No，I’ve never tried it.I hear it’s very good.
W：Yes，I’ve eaten there several times，so I know the menu quite well.
M：Sounds great！So when do you want to go?
W：Is Friday okay with you?
M：Sure.I’m not doing anything on Friday.
W：Would 7∶00 o’clock be okay?
M：Yeah，that would be a good idea.
W：Then let’s meet in front of the restaurant just before 7.
M：All right.I look forward to it.Thanks.
(Text 10)
Dear Mr.Chen Hua，
I write to tell you that the manager of our company will interview you at 9∶30 on the morning of May 18.You are asked to tell him why you want to get this job，what you are good at，for example，how many foreign languages you can speak，and what you plan to do after you begin work here.You will have to take a medical examination a week later.I will tell you at the beginning of next month whether you are successful or not.
Truly yours，
Mary Walter
答案：1～5CBAAC 6～10CBCAB
11～15BACCA 16～20BAABC
第二部分 运用(共两节，满分45分)
第一节 单项填空(共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分)
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
21．It doesn’t make sense ________ after ________.You should cheer up and practice hard instead.
A．to complain; being defeated
B．complain; defeating
C．complain; being defeated
D．to complain; defeating
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词的用法。根据句子结构可知，it在句中作形式主语，动词不定式作真正的主语，由此可以排除B、C两项；根据句意可知，you与defeat是动宾关系，即要用被动形式，由此可以排除D项。
22．It is reported that the police will soon ________ the case of the two missing children.
A．look upon B．look after
C．look into D．look out
解析：选C。句意为：据报道警察很快将着手调查两个孩子失踪的那个案件。look into意为“调查，检查”，符合句意。look upon意为“旁观”，look after意为“照顾，照料，管理”，look out意为“向外看”，均不合题意 高中学习方法。
23．Though plastic bags really brought convenience to us, they also ________ many problems for the environment.
A．led to B．referred to
C．contributed to D．appealed to
解析：选A。lead to导致；refer to提到，涉及； contribute to有助于；appeal to吸引……。
24．Everything was perfect for the picnic ________ the weather.
A．in place of B．as well as
C．except for D．in case of
解析：选C。本题考查的是词组辨析。A项in place of表示“代替，取代”；B项as well as表示“又，也，还”；C项except for意思是“除……之外”，表示在说明了基本(整体)情况之后，再对细节进行说明；D项in case of表示“万一，假使”。本句意为：除天气之外，所有情况对于野炊来说非常好。在本句中，可以将“天气”看成是“所有情况”当中的一个细节，故选择C项。
25．She ________ herself entirely to her research and it earned her a good reputation in her field.
A．contributed to B．contributed
C．devoted D．was devoted
解析：选C。考查devote oneself to sth.结构，句意为：她完全致力于她的研究，这为她在她的领域赢得了良好的声誉。
26．What all the doctors in the hospital said suggested that he ________ badly wounded and that he ________ at once.
A．should be；be operated on
B．were；must be operated on
C. were；should be operated on
D. was；be operated on
解析：选D。当suggest表示“暗示，表明”时，后接的宾语从句用陈述语气，表示“建议”时，后接的宾语从句用虚拟语气。根据语境可知，第一个宾语从句用陈述语气，而第二个宾语从句用虚拟语气，故谓语用“(should＋)动词原形”。
27．According to some signs, some experts have ________ that the global economy is beginning to recover little by little.
A．covered B．examined
C．concluded D．checked
解析：选C。句意：根据一些迹象，一些专家推断出全球经济正在开始逐渐复苏。conclude“推断出”，符合题意。cover“覆盖；报道”；examine“检查”；check“核对；核查”。
28．Five people won the “China’s Green Figure” award, a title ________ to ordinary people for their contributions to environmental protection.
A．being given B．is given
C．given D．was given
解析：选C。title与give之间为被动关系，所以用过去分词形式作定语。
29．The parents suggested ________ in the hotel room but their kids were anxious to camp out during the trip.
A．sleep B．to sleep
C．sleeping D．having slept
解析：选C。suggest在此意为“建议”，后接ing形式作宾语。
30．—What illness does the patient get?
—The doctors ________ that the patient’s disease is cancer.
A．arrive a conclusion B．come a conclusion
C．draw a conclusion D．take a conclusion
解析：选C。此题考查的是conclusion的固定搭配。和conclusion连用的一般有come to，draw，reach，arrive at等，所以此处选择C。
31．Yesterday the firemen ________ the ground carefully，but were not able to find any ________ glass.
A．examined；breaking B．cared；broken
C．examined；broken D．cared；breaking
解析：选C。句意：昨天消防队员仔细检查了地面，但是没有发现任何碎玻璃。第一个空用examine，取其检测、检查的意思；第二个空是分词作定语，强调完成，应选broken。所以此题应选择C。
32．We rejected his ________ for a music club，and decided to have an art club instead.
A．point of view B．point of sight
C．point of thought D．point of scene
解析：选A。观点的表示法是point of view，所以选择A。
33．It’s a pity that the young girl drowned herself after all her hopes were ________.
A．beaten B．defeated
C．failed D．realized
解析：选B。defeat有“希望、计划等遭到破坏”的意思，所以应该选择B。
34．Traveling abroad exposes children ________ different languages and cultures.
A．with B．to
C．of D．into
解析：选B。本句考查的是固定词组expose sb. to sth., 是“使面临……； 使遭受……”的意思。
35．Each time ________ they met, they would talk long hours together.
A．which B．when
C．during D．/
解析：选D。考查each time 作连词的用法。
第二节 完形填空(共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分)
阅读下面短文，从短文后各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
There was a sweet，wonderfilled little girl who was hurt over and over again.She __36__ that she was so bad that others just couldn’t be __37__ to her.
She asked many wise people to help her __38__ why she was so bad that even her mother hurt her，and why she was unable to be __39__ so that others wouldn’t hurt her.So she was on a __40__ that she thought was to help her be “better”，but she carried a big __41__ with her everywhere she went.__42__ was all the hurt she had experienced.During the trip she willingly __43__ what the wise people said about forgiving(宽恕)．
After 50 years，she decided to __44__ the bag up and just see what happened.When she looked inside it was filled with bits of paper.Once they had __45__ on them，detailing the hurt.But as time went on，the words __46__ slowly.She had been carrying this bag that held nothing __47__ the image (印象) of something that once was.
The little girl had now become an almostold woman.She __48__ the silliness of carrying that bag around.She started __49__ and dancing and she felt free!
She was able to see that her __50__ loved her child，but was __51__ that her little girl felt unloved.By throwing away the bag of paper and forgiving those who __52__ her，she looked in the mirror and said，“I am clever，interesting and kind.”But most __53__，she was able to say“I am lovable”．__54__ it took many years，she was finally open to bringing __55__ into her life.
She finally saw the sweet，wonderfilled little girl that she had always been.
【解题导语】 本文是一篇夹叙夹议文。一个小女孩由于屡次受到伤害，就认为别人不喜欢自己，于是踏上寻求原因的`旅程。50年过去了，她摒弃对他人的误解，爱在她心中又重新绽放。
36．A.decided B．considered
C．promised D．hoped
答案：B
37．A.bad B．sorry
C．thankful D．nice
解析：选D。因为她总是被伤害，所以她就“认为(considered)”自己是如此糟糕，以至于别人都不会对她“好(nice)”。
38．A.guess B．understand
C．expect D．invent
解析：选B。她请智者帮她来“弄清楚(understand)”为什么她这么不好，就连自己的母亲都伤害自己。
39．A.better B．worse
C．angrier D．harder
解析：选A。根据下文she thought was to help her be “better”可知，此处指“为什么自己不能更好一点，这样别人就不会伤害自己”。
40．A.holiday B．date
C．trip D．path
解析：选C。为此她踏上了寻求能使自己变得更好的旅程。下文的During the trip是提示。
41．A.bowl B．basket
C．bag D．purse
解析：选C。下文的carrying this bag that held nothing是提示。
42．A.Beneath B．Above
C．Outside D．Inside
解析：选D。她随身带的“包里(Inside)”装着她所经历过的所有的伤害。
43．A.agreed with B．fought against
C．gave up D．suffered from
解析：选A。根据下文她对过去所受伤害的释怀可知，这一路上，她十分“同意(agreed with)”这些智者所说的关于原谅的建议。
44．A.pick B．open
C．put D．break
解析：选B。根据just see what happened可知，她打算把包“打开(open up)”。
45．A.pictures B．memories
C．words D．dreams
解析：选C。这些纸上曾经都有“字(words)”，详细描述了那些伤害。
46．A.disappeared B．appeared
C．showed D．changed
解析：选A。随着时间的流逝，字迹逐渐消失不见。But一词的转折是提示。
47．A.and B．with
C．among D．but
解析：选D。这个包里现在什么也没有，除了过去对一些事情的印象。
48．A.refused B．forgot
C．realized D．preferred
解析：选C。she felt free指曾经的那个自认为受到很多伤害的小女孩释怀了。如今，她“意识到(realized)”随身带着那个装着字条的包是多么的愚蠢。
49．A.crying B．laughing
C．shouting D．worrying
解析：选B。由下文的dancing and she felt free可知她开始开怀大笑。
50．A.daughter B．mother
C．teacher D．friend
答案：B
51．A.sad B．happy
C．excited D．hopeful
解析：选A。释怀之后，她可以到她的母亲很爱她，但却因为自己的孩子感觉不到被爱而“悲伤(sad)”。
52．A.liked B．hurt
C．educated D．ignored
解析：选B。这里指小女孩原谅了那些曾经“伤害(hurt)”过她的人。
53．A.surprisingly B．terribly
C．nervously D．importantly
解析：选D。此句话是相对于前面的I am clever，interesting and kind而言的，因此，后者说，更为重要的是I am lovable。她意识到自己也是讨人喜欢的。
54．A.Although B．If
C．Because D．So
解析：选A。本句话的意思是：尽管花费了多年时间，但是她最后还是……。前后句之间是转斩关系。
55．A.trouble B．love
C．money D．future
解析：选B。由于爱的缺失，在这个小女孩的眼里，别人对她不好，伤害她，而她也不相信别人对她好。但学会了原谅之后，爱在她的生活里重新绽放。
第三部分 阅读理解(共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分)
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、C和D)中，选出最佳选项。
A
It was almost four o’clock in the morning when the fire broke out.“We watch one window blow out，and then another，and heard people shouting，”says Stanley,21，a junior from Westfield State College in Massachusetts.Students were throwing ropes made from bed sheets out their windows，and a couple of them were trying to climb down.
Almost all the hotel’s 502 rooms were filled with college students from across the United States who were spending their holiday here in Acpulco，Mexico.As the smoke thickened，Moreno ran upstairs to where other Westfield students were rooming.“Some people had no idea what was going on，”he says.“I was shouting at the top of my voice.I made sure I hit every door.”At the same time，Stanley was downstairs helping people get through the smokefilled hall.There he joined forces with Nalewanski who had just come back from his own night out.
“Let’s go.”Nalewanski says.He and Stanley wet their shirts in the bathroom and wrapped them around their mouths and noses so they could breathe.Then they ran up the stairs.
Nalewanski and Stanley found Moreno on the fourth floor.They all ran upstairs and down the corridors(走廊) on every floor，hitting every door hard.
In the end，no one was seriously injured.Even more unbelievable，all the Westfield students made it back to Massachusetts later that same day.
Westfield president Evan Dobelle says，“I have a great deal of pride in these young men and they were able to react in such an emergency.”
56．What’s the best title for this passage?
A．College students have a terrible holiday
B．College students survived a big fire
C．Heroes：close call in a hotel fire
D. A big fire broke out in a hotel
解析：选C。本文为记叙文，主要讲了Stanley，Moreno和Nalewanski在火灾中冒着生命危险，逐个房间敲门，全部脱险的故事，最后校长说“I have a great deal of pride in these young men...”。由此我们可以看出文章的主题突出了对“英雄”的介绍。
57．What do we learn from Stanley from the passage?
A．He is in his last year in college.
B．He is a very brave young man.
C．He was reading a book when the fire broke out.
D．He was the first one to find out there was a fire.
解析：选B。细节推断题。根据第一段．..，a junior from Westfield State College...可知A项错误。C、D两项文中未提及。
58．According to the passage ________ might not have woken up people during the fire.
A．Evan Dobelle B．Nalewanski
C．Stanley D．Moreno
解析：选A。细节理解题。A项为校长，不在现场。
59．The students helped people out through all of the following ways EXCEPT ________.
A．helping people get through the hall
B．shouting loudly to warn people
C．hitting doors to wake people up
D．Making ropes for people to climb down
解析：选D。细节理解题。根据第二段Stanley was downstairs helping people get through the smokefilled hall.可知A项符合原文。根据第二段I was shouting at the top of my voice.I made sure I hit every door.可知B、C两项符合原文。
B
A trip to the library can change your life.That is the idea of the Get It Loud in Libraries project，which challenges the habit of speaking in a low voice.The sweet tones of singer Diana Vickers rang out recently，surrounded by books as well as fans，at Lancaster Library.Plan B，Adele，Florence and the Machine，Speech Debelle，and the Thrills have also performed for the project.
This fiveyear project aims to increase access(进入) to libraries while developing youth talent and has attracted more than 8,500 visitors,5,000 of whom are firsttime library users.
“I think it’s wonderful，”Vickers says.“I’ve been playing in front of big crowds and I’m excited about close environments where you can be close to your fans.”
As a child growing up in nearby Blackburn，she says that her school library was a “second home”to her.When she was young she loved Peter Rabbit and Mr.Men books，and later her favorites included Little Women and The Lovely Bones.
Attracted by the stage，the young who would once never have been to a library have been returning to borrow books and CDs.The project’s founder，Stewart Parsons，has worked in libraries for 25 years.He feels that the concerts have made libraries something that the young want to be part of.A mother，Lauren Zawadzki，sent him a text message after a concert：“Your work is great！！！Both Izaak and Dom have been reading in the library for the last half hour...You should be proud.They would never have suggested that before the concerts.”
Parsons hopes that the activity is changing the way people view libraries.“My big worry is that libraries trail(拖拉)behind slightly；they shouldn’t.This is about bringing libraries up to date.The beautiful thing is that people are reconnecting with the library in a way they haven’t done before.”
【解题导语】 本文是一篇，报道了一些图书馆为了吸引读者，在图书馆举办音乐活动，颠覆了人们认为图书馆应该安静的认识。
60．The Get It Loud in Libraries project aims to ________.
A．collect money for libraries to buy books
B．attract more people to read in libraries
C．provide a performing place for music lovers
D．develop youth talent for singing
解析：选B。细节理解题。根据第一段的A trip to the library can change your life.That is the idea of the Get It Loud in Libraries project，...和第二段的This fiveyear project aims to increase access(进入) to libraries while developing youth talent可知其目的是让更多的人来图书馆读书。
61．According to the passage，Vickers’s attitude towards Libraries project is that of ________.
A．praise B．unconcern
C．doubt D．worry
解析：选A。推理判断题。由第三段Vicker的话可推断出，她认为Libraries project非常好，持支持态度。故A正确。
62．What can we know about Diana Vickers from the passage?
A．She once worked at a library.
B．She doesn’t like being close to her fans.
C．She liked reading in her childhood.
D．She complains about the noisy environment.
解析：选C。推理判断题。结合第四段的As a child...she says that her school library was a “second home” to her.When she was young she loved...可知Vickers小的时候喜欢读书。
63．According to the passage，Zawadzki ________.
A．advised libraries to keep quiet
B．praised Parsons for helping her reading
C．found her children’s talent for singing
D．praised the Get It Loud in Libraries project
解析：选D。细节理解题。根据Zawadzki发的短信Both Izaak and Dom have been ... that before the concerts可知，她的两个儿子现在喜欢到图书馆看书了，而在图书馆举办音乐会前，儿子从未要求去过，因此推断她很赞赏这个项目。
C
What will people die of 100 years from now? If you think that is a simple question，you have not been paying attention to the revolution that is taking place in biotechnology.With the help of new medicine，the human body will last a very long time.Death will come mainly from accidents，murder and war.Today’s leading killers，such as heart disease，cancer，and aging itself，will become distant memories.
In discussion of technological changes，the Internet gets most of the attention these days.But the change in medicine can be the real technological event of our times.How long can humans live? Human brains were known to decide the final death.Cells are the basic units of all living things，and until recently，scientists were sure that the life of cells could not go much beyond 120 years because the basic materials of cells，such as those of brain cells，would not last forever.But the upper limits will be broken by new medicine.Sometime between 2050 and 2100，medicine will have advanced to the point at which every 10 years or so，people will be able to take medicine to repair their organs.The medicine，made up of the basic building materials of life，will build new brain cells，heart cells，and so on－in much the same way our bodies make new skin cells to take the place of old ones.
It is exciting to imagine that the advance in technology may be changing the most basic condition of human existence，but many technical problems still must be cleared up on the way to this wonderful future.
【解题导语】 随着科技、医学的发展，未来的某天，人类的寿命会得到无限制地延长。年龄与疾病对生命不再构成威胁。
64．According to the passage，human death is now mainly caused by ________.
A．diseases and aging B．accidents and war
C．accidents and aging D．heart disease and war
解析：选A。根据第一段最后一句“Today’s leading killers，such as heart disease，cancer，and aging itself，will become distant memories.”可知目前导致人类死亡的主要原因是疾病和衰老。
65．In the author’s opinion，today’s most important advance in technology lies in ________.
A．medicine B．the Internet
C．brain cells D．human organs
解析：选A。根据第二段“But the change in medicine can be the real technological event of our times.”可以推断出答案选A。
66．Humans may live longer in the future because ________.
A．heart disease will be far away from us
B．human brains can decide the final death
C．the basic materials of cells will last forever
D．human organs can be repaired by new medicine
解析：选D。根据第二段“But the upper limits will be broken by new medicine...medicine will have advanced to the point at which every 10 years or so，people will be able to take medicine to repair their organs.”可知医药将能够修复人的器官，从而使人活得更长。
67．How long can humans live in the future according to the passage?
A．Over 100 years.
B．More than 120 years.
C．About 150 years.
D．The passage doesn’t tell us.
解析：选B。根据第二段第五、六句“...scientists were sure that the life of cells could not go much beyond 120 years because the basic materials of cells，such as those of brain cells，would not last forever.But the upper limits will be broken by new medicine.”可知答案为B。
D
When it comes to friends，I desire those who will share my happiness，who possess wings of their own and who will fly with me.I seek friends whose qualities illuminate(照亮) me and train me up for love.It is for these people that I reserve the glowing hours，too good not to share.
When I was in the eighth grade，I had a friend.We were shy and“too serious”about our studies when it was becoming fashionable with our classmates to learn acceptable social behaviors.We said little at school，but she would come to my house and we would sit down with pencils and paper，and one of us would say：“Let’s start with a train whistle today.”We would sit quietly together and write separate poems or stories that grew out of a train whistle.Then we would read them aloud.At the end of that school year，we，too，were changed into social creatures and the stories and poems stopped.
When I lived for a time in London，I had a friend.He was in despair(失望)and I was in despair.But our friendship was based on the idea in each of us that we would be sorry later if we did not explore this great city because we had felt bad at the time.We met every Sunday for five weeks and found many excellent things.We walked until our despairs disappeared and then we parted.We_gave_London_to_each_other.
For almost four years I have had remarkable friend whose imagination illuminates mine.We write long letters in which we often discover our strangest selves.Each of us appears，sometimes in a funny way，in the other’s dreams.She and I agree that，at certain times，we seem to be parts of the same mind.In my most interesting moments，I often think：“Yes，I must tell.”We have never met.
It is such comforting companions I wish to keep.One bright hour with their kind is worth more to me than the lifetime services of a psychologist(学家)，who will only fill up the healing(愈合的)silence necessary to those darkest moments in which I would rather be my own best friend. 新课标第一网
68．In the eighth grade，what the author did before developing proper social behavior was to ________.
A．become serious about her study
B．go to her friend’s house regularly
C．learn from her classmates at school
D．share poems and stories with her friend
解析：选D。细节理解题。由第二段内容中的“We would sit quietly together and write separate poems or stories that grew out of a train whistle.Then we would read them aloud.At the end of that school year，we，too，were changed into social creatures and the stories and poems stopped.”可知答案应为D项。
69．In Paragraph 3，“We gave London to each other”probably means ________.
A．our exploration of London was a memorable gift to both of us
B．we were unwilling to tear ourselves away from London
C．our unpleasant feeling about London disappeared
D．we parted with each other in London
解析：选A。句意理解题。由第三段内容可知在我们的沮丧消失后，我们分开了，我们给对方留下了自己开拓的空间，故应选择A项。
70．According to Paragraph 4，the author and her friend ________.
A．call each other regularly
B．have similar personalities
C．enjoy writing to each other
D．dream of meeting each other
解析：选C。细节推断题。由第四段内容可知“我”和“我”的朋友写了四年时间的信，由此可以推断他们都喜欢互相写信。
71．What is the best title for the passage?
A．Unforgettable Experiences
B．Remarkable Imagination
C．Lifelong Friendship
D．Noble Companions
解析：选D。归纳标题题。全文讲述了朋友在自己成长过程中的重要作用，故应选择D项。C项表示“终生的友谊”，而文中的每一种友谊都不是终生的，故C项是错误的。
E
Getting paid to talk about the World Cup is a great job.I’m not a football commentator(评论员)，though—just an English teacher in Japan.
I came to Japan two years ago，and didn’t think I would stay，but Japan has that effect on you.People_often_end_up_living_here_longer_than_they_planned.I think it’s best to teach in a bigger city where there are other foreigners to mix with，rather than a small town where English teachers often complain of feeling like a goldfish in a bowl.Many people choose to live in Tokyo，of course，which is good for the nightlife factor.But I’d say that for general quality of living，cities of neither too large nor too small，like Sapporo where I live，are better choices.
I teach English privately，which means I’m my own boss.If you want to devote yourself to private teaching，it’s well worth doing a TEFL course first，because your lessons will be much better for it.The problem with private teaching is finding students；it took me a year to build up a full schedule(日程表) of private lessons，so I started out teaching in schools parttime.
Most of my foreign friends here work fulltime for big English conversation schools.The salary is fine to live on，but whether you can save money depends on how much going out and traveling you do here.
The schools are reluctant to take time off—even teachers with tickets for the EnglandArgentina game had trouble getting the day off.
72．From the passage we know in Japan the writer likes to live in ________.
A．Tokyo B．a small town
C．a city of middle site D．a big city
解析：选C。细节理解题。第二段中的But I’d say that for general quality of living，cities of neither too large nor too small，like Sapporo where I live，are better choices.说明作者喜欢住在中等城市中。neither too large nor too small表示是一个不大不小的城市，即大小适中的城市，与a city of middle size同义。
73．According to the writer，one had better ________ first to do private teaching better.
A．take a TEFL course
B．decide his or her own lessons
C．find students
D．build up a full schedule
解析：选A。细节理解题。根据第三段中的If you want to devote yourself to private teaching，it’s well worth doing a TEFL course first，because your lessons will be much better for it.可判断出为了把私立教学搞好，首先要参加TEFL课程，因为TEFL课程可以使私立教学搞得更好。
74．The underlined sentence in the second paragraph implies that ________.
A．there are many foreigners in Japan
B．Japan is good for nightlife
C．they can teach English privately in Japan
D．Japan has something more attractive than expected
解析：选D。猜义题。根据上文中的I came to Japan two years ago，and didn’t think I would stay，but Japan has that effect on you.可判断出这句话的意思是“日本有些比想象得更吸引人的东西。”作者本来没有打算呆在日本，但是在那儿已呆了两年，这超出了预料，其原因是日本有一些吸引人的东西。
75．The underlined word“reluctant”in the passage may probably mean ________.
A．kind B．unwilling
C．free D．careless
解析：选B。词义猜测题。根据下文中的even teachers with tickets for the EnglandArgentina game had trouble getting the day off可判断出reluctant意为“不愿意”，因为had trouble getting the day off表示在休假方面有困难，说明校方不愿意让休假。
第Ⅱ卷(共35分)
第四部分 写作(共两节，满分35分)
第一节 短文填词(共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)
阅读下面短文，根据以下提示：1)汉语提示，2)首字母提示，3)语境提示，在每个空格内填入一个适当的，并将该词完整地写在右边相对应的横线上。所填单词要求意义准确，拼写正确。
With the development of agriculture
and industry，more and more people are
pouring into big cities，________ causes 76.________
so much trouble.________ the growth 77.________
of the population，city problems are
g________.To begin with，big cities are 78.________
becoming so ________(拥挤) that it 79.________
makes finding a job difficult.People without
a job probably become a d________ 80.________
to our society.In addition，the environ
ment is getting w________，and there 81.________
are traffic problems and pollution prob
lems as ________.We have to face them .82.________
Big cities need to control the population
to h________develop 83.________
________(自己) for the future.As for 84.________
protecting the environment，I think every
________(市民) should contribute to 85.________
protecting the environment.
答案：76.which 77.With 78.growing 79.crowded
80．danger 81.worse 82.well 83.help 84.themselves 85.citizen
第二节 书面表达(满分25分)
Teenagers杂志Conversation with Brad栏目的负责人Brad收到了李华的一封来信。仔细阅读下面的来信，帮助Brad用英语写一封回信，给出分析并提出合理的建议。
Q &A 互动空间
Dear editor，
I’m a senior high school student，and I want to work parttime this summer.I think it is good to do so，but my parents don’t agree with me.I just can’t understand them.I need your advice.
Lora
假定你是李华，请根据所给材料，给Lora写封回信。
要求写出下列要点：
1．Lora打算利用打工；
2．Lora父母不同意的理由；
3．你给Lora的具体建议。
注意：1.词数120左右；
2．可适当增加情节使行文连贯；
3．开头与结尾已为你写好，不计入总词数。
Dear Lora，
I read your letter in the magazine.______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Yours truly，
Li Hua
Dear_Lora，
I_read_your_letter_in_the_magazine.I know that you want to work parttime this summer.But your parents don’t agree with you.
I think your parents may have their reasons.They may regard learning as the most important task for you.Perhaps they’d like you to make use of this summer holiday to study.Besides，they may think you are too young to work.
My advice for you is this：you’d better have a talk with your parents.If they agree，you should make a detailed plan for your study and work，ask your friends to work together with you，and tell your parents not to worry about you because you are old enough to manage things properly.
Anyway，I wish you a pleasant summer.
Yours_truly，
Li_Hua
er.
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit23.doc
标题 Telephones
章节 第二十三单元
关键词 高二英语第二十三单元
内容
一、教学目的和要求
1、单词和词组
四会：get together all the best have a word with in other words
三会：excellent chat connect with hine wind (Vt.) strengthen frequently
recover smart distant lately interrupt remind lack due income
announce bargain sew needle thread frequent free of charge
二会：dial have…on conversation handle (n) directory telephone directory
redirect redirection mobile cordless
2、日常交际用语
Hello, Can I speak to …; please? There is no…here.
I’m sorry, I think I dialled the wrong number.
Hello, Is that…? I called to ask/tell you….
Hold on , I’ll go and get…
Please could I have a word with…?
I’ll have to ring off now. Someone wants to use the phone.
二、重点与难点分析
Lesson 89
1. Would you like a word with her? 你想和他说话吗？
like a word with sb. =have a word with sb.和某人说句话
其中的a word 也可以用a few words代替，表示“说几句话”。
I’d like (to have )a word with you .Are you free now? 我想和你说句话，你现在有空吗？
Could I have a few words with you, Mr. Green? 格林先生，我可以同你讲几句话吗？
2. The speaker’s supposed to be excellent. 人们认为这位发言人很不错。
suppose 意为“认为”“猜想”，常用于不定式复合结构( suppose sb./sth. to be) 表示“认为某人/某事如何”。
Jenny is supposed to be the best student in our class. 珍妮被认为是我们班最好的学生。
People in old times supposed to earth to be flat. But now we know it is round. 古时候人们认为地球是平的，我们现在知道它是圆的。
3. We must get together some other time for a chat. 我们必须见见面谈一下。
get together 聚会，联欢。
The students get together for an English evening. 学生们开了一次英语晚会。
4. All the best. 祝你万事如意
是临别时表示祝愿的用语相当于All the best wishes to you.
All the best with your family. 祝你全家好。
All the best in your business. 祝你事业顺利。
All the best in your new job. 祝你在新的岗位一上切顺利。
5. I’ll have to ring off now. 我得挂电话了。
ring off把电话挂断
After she said this, she rang off. 说完这句话，她把电话放下了。
Lesson 90
1. How a telephone works is a question which not everyone can answer. 电话是怎样工作的这个问题，并不是每个人都能回答的。
How a telephone works是主语从句。
以连接代词what, which, who (m)等，及连接副词when, where, why, how及连词that, whether引导的从句，可充当主语从句。
How he became a scientist is known to us all. 他怎么成为一个科学家是人所共知的。
Whether he will come or not is still a question. 他来不来还是个问题。
2. In those days, to make a call, you had to wind a handle at the side of your telephone. 那些日子你要打电话就得转动电话机旁的手柄。
1) make a call打电话
make a call to sb. 给某人打电话。
2) wind (wound, wound)v 转动（手柄），上（发条）
Don’t wind that handle. 不要转动那手柄。
Don’t forget to wind the alarm clock before you go to bed. 上床前，别忘了上闹钟发条。
3. The problem with electrical signals is that they get weaker and weaker as they travel along metal wires. 电信号有个难解决的问题，就是当它沿着金属导线传送时信号会变得越来越弱。
get weaker and weaker. 变得越来越弱
When winter is coming, the days are getting shorter and shorter. 冬天来临，白天越来越短。
4. It also shows you the caller’s telephone number in order that you recognize who it is. 它可以把呼叫人的电话号码给你显示出来，以便你认出是谁在呼叫。
in order that相当于so that，后接目的状语从句，从句中常may, might, can, could, should等情态动词。
In order that he could catch the early bus, I woke him up very early. 我很早就叫醒他，以便他能赶上早班车。
in order that和so that的词义和用法相似，但前者既可以放在主句前，也可以放在主句后，而so that只能放在主句后。
I’m making a note of it in order that (so that) it will not be forgotten. 我把这事记下来，以免忘记。
Lesson 91
1. you can take it with you whenever you go … 无论你走到哪儿…，你都可以带着它。
whenever是连词，意为“无论何地”，“不管…在哪里”…引起让步状语从句
We found people friendly whenever we went. 不管我们走到哪里，我们发现人们都很友好。
Whenever he goes, I’ll go with him. 不论他走到哪里，我都跟他走。
2. In other words, you can walk to a distant part of the office or factory to check the information about a product without putting the phone down. 换句话说，你可以走到远离办公室或工厂的地方去核查资料，而无须把电话机放下。
1) in other words意为“换句话说”相当于that is to say
This kind of phone is cordless, in other words, it has no cords or wires. 这种电话是“无绳的”，换句话说，电话上没有导线。
2) record v /rikd/ v记录，录音
Listen to the speaker and record what he says. 听演说者讲，把他的话录下来。
Who holds the record of the high jump? 谁是跳高记录的保持者？
Play some records of dance music. 请播忙乱一些舞蹈单位的唱片。
3. However, you do have to remember their names. 但是，你务必要记住别人的姓名才行啊
句中的do是助动词，用在肯定句或祈使句中表示强调。
Do come and see me next week! 下周一定要来看我啊！
We do need some mobile phones. 我们的确需要一些移动式电话。
4. Will you be able to bring along the new model telephone you were talking about? 你能否把你们在谈论的新式电话机带来？
短语bring along意为“带来”
Please bring along your dictionary here next time. 下次请把你的字典带到这儿来
bring about 引起、实现、造成
He brought about a quarrel between his parents. 他在父母间惹起了一场争吵。
Seeing you brought back many memories. 看到你使我想起了许多往事。
bring up提出，抚养
Tom was brought up by his aunt. 汤姆是由姑姑养大。
三、同步测试
Ⅰ、单项选择
1. In the text the author doesn’t mention ______.
A. the working principles of telephones and great advances in telephone equipment.
B. the earliest telephones and the first telephone directory
C. the telephone in the office
D. who invented telephones
2. Which signal can travel the longest distance?
A. Sound signals B. Light signals C. Electrical signals D. Language signals
3. Telephone directories have got a history of more than ______.
A. 100 years B. 90 years C. 80 years D. 70 years
4. The word “frequently ” means ______.
A. often B. seldom C. ever D. never
5. You have given me so much help, and this is ______ you should get in return.
A. why B. that C. what D. how
6. You have no idea ______ worried I was.
A. what B. whether C. why D. how
7. The question is ______ we shall go there so early tomorrow.
A. if B. whether C. where D. when
8. ______team will win the match is still unknown.
A. whether B. why C. how D. which
9. Is ______ you told me really true?
A. what B. that C. when D. where
10. You should work tonight ______ watching TV.
A. instead of B. so that C. in case D. even of
11. I have such a bad cold that I have lost all ______ of smell.
A. sense B. strength C. skill D. degree
12. He went to bed drunk, and when he woke he woke up he found that he still ______ except.
A. had no nothing B. put on nothing C. dress nothing D. had nothing on
13. He failed ______ carelessness.
A. because B. due for C. due to D. for
14. The new highway will ______ the city to several towns in the country.
A. connect B. join C. unite D. put
15. In came a dirty-looking woman ______ a baby ______ her arms.
A. having; on B. with; on C. with; in D. had; at
参考答案：
Ⅰ、1.D 2.B 3.A 4.A 5.C 6.D 7.B 8.D 9.A 10.A 11.A 12.D 13.C 14.B 15.C
A
People celebrate birthdays in almost every country on Earth. And they celebrate them in many different ways.
In China and Japan, for example, the arrival of the New Year is more important then a person’s birthday. So, everyone adds a year to their ages on New Year’s Day, instead of on their birthdays.
In Brazil the special birthday food isn’t cake, but special candies. In China, it’s long noodles-for long life. In Iceland, pancakes with candies rolled inside them are served on birthdays.
In Great Britain, a birthday is all-day celebration. At school, the birthday kid is lifted up and “bumped” by his classmates. This means the person is lifted by the ankles and arms and bumped on the ground, once for each year and once for growth. In Israel, the same custom is followed, except the birthday person is raised and lowered while sitting in a chair.
In Holland, children not only get gifts, but they give things out, too. It’s customary to give cakes, cookies, and candies to your classmates and teacher on your birthday.
In Mexico ,it’s good luck to give birthday greetings as early in the day as possible. So it’s not unusual to be awakened at midnight by friends singing birthday sons.
In India, birthday celebrations also begin before dawn. The birthday is also a religious event, so prayers and blessings must be said before dawn. And the birthday person gets to stay home from school that day.
In Thailand, two tall candles are lighted the night before a birthday. One is as tall as the birthday person. It stands for how long the birthday person will live. If it goes out early, it’s bad luck. Another Thai custom involves buying live fish and birds. The birthday person frees the animals, which brings luck.
In Nigeria, people don’t celebrate individual birthdays. Instead, everyone in a certain age group celebrates together on a certain day.
In may countries, birthday customs are changing. Old customs are giving way to Western style birthdays, complete with candle-topped cakes. But one thing never changes-Birthdays are special days for everyone!
1. It’s a custom to lift and lower the birthday person in a chair in ______.
A. Britain B. Israel C. Britain and Israel D. Israel and Thailand
2. In Mexico the birthday greetings are usually given at midnight because _____.
A. birthday celebrations must begin before dawn
B. the birthday person must be awakened at midnight
C. prayers must be said before dawn
D. it will cause good things to happen to the birthday person
3. According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true?
A. In Western countries people eat a candle-topped cake at the end of the birthday party.
B. In Western countries a birthday cake is always prepared for a birthday person.
C. Every Japanese adds a year to their ages on New Year’s Day.
D. More and more people celebrate their birthdays in Western style.
4. According to the passage, which of the following is true?
A. In Thailand people give fish and birds to the birthday person as gifts.
B. In Holland people give gifts to unbirthday persons.
C. In Nigeria people who were born in the dame period may celebrate their birthdays on the dame day.
D. In Thailand a candle will be lighted on the birthday night.
5. How many countries are mentioned in this passage?
A. Eight. B. Nine. C. Ten. D. Eleven
keys:
1. B 2.D 3.A 4.C 5.D
B
The subject of this year’s Kunming International Expo（博览会）is “man and nature walking hand in hand into the 21st Century”. When the UK was asked to take pare, it seemed natural to build a garden. Now the British Garden will be a central part when Expo opens on May1.
David Patterson, the Curator（馆长）of the Department of the Royal Botanic Garden in Edinburgh, is leading the team now putting the finishing touches to the garden. The Royal Botanic Gardens were chosen for a very good reason. They have the largest collection of Chinese plants in the world outside China.
“Ever since people in Britain started gardening for pleasure they have used Chinese plants, ” Patterson told English Corner. “There are probably Chinese flowers in nearly every garden in Britain. This is a good chance to give something back.”
The garden has been carefully designed to mix traditional British skills with the local Chinese environment. David Patterson describes the garden as “formal but gentle”. It contains a raised flower bed, a summer house and a lot of local trees. The garden is contained behind a wall of local, yellow stone . It is intended to be a place of serious thinking and quiet enjoyment.
“You could say that we’ve painted a picture, ” said David Patterson.” And we have designed the garden to continue for a long time, so that the people of Kunming will be able to enjoy it long after the Expo is over.”
1. Visitors to the Kunming International Expo will most probably feel ______.
A. man is the master of nature B. man quite agrees with nature
C. nature is a helping hand to man D. China has a long history of gardening
2. The underlined expression “putting the finishing touches to the garden” here means ______.
A. starting building the garden
B. examining the main body of the garden
C. doing the last part of the work to the garden
D. completing the design of the garden
3. In the British Garden you will feel ______.
A. nothing familiar B. everything British C. excited and noisy
D. quiet and happy
4. The passage is mainly ______.
A. an introduction to the British Garden
B. an explanation of the design of the British Garden
C. a high praise for the Chinese gardening
D. a short talk on this year’s Kunming International Expo
keys:
1. B 2.C 3.D 4.A
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit11doc
标题 Hurricane
章节 第十一单元
关键词 高二英语第十一单元
内容
一、教学目的和要求
⒈ 单词和词组
四会：L42 midnight push over path bring down branch bath awake
L43 weatherman pipe or so take the place of
三会：L41 heaven Gogd heavens anxious be anxious about expect fortunately warn warning likely painful
L42 normal strike block pole lamp cottage plastic blanket call in
L43 altogether surprisingly broadcast(n.) clear away
二会：L41 hurricane
L42 per kph=kilometre(s) per hour
L43 kew Garders
⒉ 日常交际用语
We were getting very worried.
We are anxious about…
What’s the matter with your…, Jane?
Is there anything the matter?
There’s no need to be worried.
⒊ 语法
学习过去分词作宾语补足语的用法。
二、重点难点分析
L41
⒈ Jane and Pippa have just returned from walking in the hills.
Jane and Pippa刚从山区散步回来。
句中的“return from”意为“从……归来”，介词from后面接表示地点活动的名词，或者接动词-ing形式，表示“做完某件事以后回来”，例如：
⑴My mother returned from work very late last night. 我母亲昨晚很晚才下班。
⑵Dr Li has just returned from seeing a patient in the countryside. 李医生刚从乡下看一位病人回来。
*“return to”意为“回到（某处）去”，return=go back 例如：
He sent her off a telegram announcing his immediate return to London.
他给她发了一封电报，告之他马上要返回伦敦。
*表示“返回”时，return可用于引伸意义。
Production returned to normal after only one year. 只用了一年时间，生产就恢复了正常。
*return表示“归还”时，是及物动词=give back
例如：return the dictionary to him或return him the dictionary
但如果直接宾语是代词it或them，只能说return it / them to him，不能说return him it / them
⒉We’re been anxious about you. 我们一直为你们担忧。
“be anxious about”意为“为……着急”。相当于be worried about. 后接人或事物名词。
⑴The students are getting anxious about the results of their examination. 学生都在为他们的考试成绩着急。
⑵The doctors are anxious about his health. 医生们都担心他的健康情况。
“be anxious for”意为“渴望得到或渴望知道”，相当于be eager for，后接具体事物名词或抽象名词。
⑴I was anxious for a new bike. 我渴望得到一辆新自行车。
⑵We were anxious for news of your safe arrival. 我们渴望知道你安全到达的消息。
anxious还可用作定语，意为“令人担心的”
His ill health has been a very anxious business. 他身体不好令人担心。
⒊My shoe has been pressing against my foot, so it huits a bit. 我的鞋子夹脚，所以脚有点痛。
press在句中意为“夹”，“挤”，即可作及物动词，也可作不及物动词。
My toe presses (vi.) against my shoe. 我的鞋子夹脚趾。
My shoes presses(t.) my toe.
⒋We’re just heard a warning on the radio that a hurricane is likely to come. 我们刚从广播里听到一则气象警报，说飓风可能要来。
句中的likely adj. 很可能的，可预期的。
be likely to do sth意为“可能”（发生某种情况解）
Mike is not likely to pass the final exam. 迈克不可能通过期末考试。
Lesson 42
⒈Between the hours of midnight and 6a.m. the hurricane crossed the southeast correr of England with winds of up to 160 kph. 从午夜时分到清晨6点之间，飓风横扫英格兰的东南角，风速高达每小时160公里。
⑴wind既可以作可数名词，也可以作不可数名词，当用于复数形式(winds)时表示“一阵阵的风”，如：Cold winds were blowing from the north. 阵阵寒风从北方吹来。
⑵160kph读作：one hundred and sixty kilometres per hour kph是kilometres per hour的缩写形式。
⑶up to … 所用于的几种情况
①Jack is driving his car at a speed of up to 120 kph. 杰克正在以每小时120 公里的高速行驶。
②It’s up to parents to teach their children manners. 父母有责任教育他们的子女懂礼貌。
③He went straight up to the door. 他一直走到大门口。
④What are you up to now? 你现在正在干什么？
⒉Besides, it was autumn and therefore the trees still had their leaves on. 再说，又是秋天，树上还有树叶。
have on意为“穿着，戴着”，句中的“had their leaves on”意为“树叶披戴在树上”。
①When he left, he had on a dark shirt. 他离开时，穿着一件深色衬衫。
②Each table has a tablecloth on in the dining room. 餐厅里每张餐桌上都有一块桌布。
⒊For these reasons, the strong winds pushed over the tree very easily. 由于这些原因，大风很容易把这些树刮倒。
push over意为“推倒”“刮倒”。
①Take care not to push the baby over. 当心，别把这个婴儿碰倒了。
②I was nearly pushed over by a crowd of boys suddenly pouring out of the school gate. 我几乎被一群突然冲出校门的男孩们给挤倒了。
⒋Fifteen million trees had been blown down by the high winds, blocking roads, paths and railway lines. 1500万棵树被狂风刮倒，把大小道路和铁路都堵塞了。
⑴有些形容词可以用来修饰wind，如：
a high wind(强风) / a strong wind；an adverse / a contrary / head wind逆风；
a fair wind顺风; a light / soft wind微风; a cold / an icy / piercing wind寒风
⑵blocking roads, paths and railway lines. 是-ing短语，用作状语，表示结果。例如：
His parents died in the same year, leaving her an orphan. 在同一年里他的父母都去世了，（结果）他成了孤儿。
⒌Electricity lines as well as telephone poles were brought down by falling trees or branches. 树或树枝在倒落时，把电线连同电话线杆一起都撞倒了。
⑴as well as是连词词组，意为“同”、“和”，当其连接两个并列的主语时，谓语动词应与前面的主语一致。例如：
①Air as well as water is matter. 空气和水
②My sister as well as my parents enjoys music. 我的父母和姐姐都喜欢音乐。
⑵短语动词bring down意为“使倒下”，“晕倒”。
He rode too fast and brought down an old lady. 他骑车骑车得太快了，撞倒了一位老太太。
⒍Many towns and villages had their water supply cut off because there was no electricity. 因为没有电，所以许多城镇和村庄都断了水。
⑴句中的had their water supply cut off是have sth. done句型，意为“某物遭到/受到……”.
①I’ll have my hair cut. 我要请人理发。
②I had my wallet stolen. 我的钱包被人偷了。
⑵短语动词cut off意为“切断”、“剪掉”、“割掉”。
①The gas company cut off our gas supply. 煤气公司中断了我们的煤气供应。
②The worker had a finger cut off by the machine. 这个工人的一个手指被机器轧断了。
⒎One woman was lying in bed, awake, listening to the rushing winds. 有位妇女醒着躺在床上，静听着那疾驰而过的大风。
⑴句中的awake意为“醒着”，作状语，表示伴随状态。
I did my homework in the living-room, careful not to make any mistakes. 我在客厅里做作业，小心谨慎地防止出错。
⑵listening to the rushing winds是-ing短语，作伴随状语。
Mother sat there, silent, thinking of her past. 妈妈静静地坐在那里，想起了她的过去。
⒏The army was called in to cut through fallen trees and to help clear the roads and paths. 召来部队把倒下来的树锯断，并帮忙清理大小道路。
⑴句中的短语动词call意为“请来”、“找来”、“召开”
①Your father is very ill; You should call in a doctor at once. 你父亲病得很重；你应该立刻把医生请来。
②I think we ought to call in a specialist at this point. 我想在这个时候应当请专家来看看。
⑵句中的短语动词cut through意为“剪断”、“切断”、“穿透”。
①They had to cut through the mountaicn to make a railway here. 他们不得不把这座山凿穿，以便在这儿修建铁路。
②The bitter wind cut through his jacket. 寒风吹透了他的夹克衫。
⑶fallen trees意为“倒下来的树”，过去分词fallen有“被动”或“完成”的概念，在句中作定语，修饰名词trees，强调动作的完成；falling trees意为“正在倒下来的树”，现在分词falling修饰名词trees，强调动作的进行，例如：fallen leaves落叶 falling leaves正在落的叶子
⒐They worked long hours for several weeks before everything returned to normal. 他们长时间的工作了好几个星期，才使一切恢复工作。
⑴句中的before是连词，连接一个表示时间的状语从句，意为“在……（之后）才”。例如：
①I practised a year before I was able to teach. 我实习了一年才能进行教学。
②We walked two hours in the rain before we reached there. 我们在雨中走了两个小进才到那儿。
⑵return to normal恢复正常
His temperature has returned to normal. 他的体温已经恢复正常了。
Lesson 43
⒈Millions of young trees have already been planted to take the place of those which were blown over. 已经种上了千百万棵小树来取代那些被刮倒的树。
⑴动词短语take the place of意为“代替”、“取代”。
Who will take the place of Mr Green as judge? 谁来代替格林先生担任法官？
也可以说take one’s place
以上例句子写成：Who will take Mr Green’s place as judge?
⑵比较：take place举行；发生（无被动语态）
①The wedding took place yesterday. 婚礼是昨天举行的。
②The accident took place only on hour ago. 事故仅在1小时之前发生。
⒉Surpringly, the weather report on the evening before the storm said there would be strong winds, but not a hurricane. 令人惊奇的是，风暴发生之前的那个晚上，天气预报说，将有强风，而没有飓风。
表示“在晚上”用in the evening表示在某个特定的晚上时，要用介词on。
例如：on Monday of October 12在星期一的晚上
on the evening of October 12 在十月十二日的晚上
on the evening before the storm在风暴发生前一天的那个晚上
⒊The weatherman in his TV broadcast repeated this to millions of people and then said that there would be no hurricane. 气象员在电视中却对数百万观众反复作了上述的预报，并而说不会有飓风。
weatherman（weather+man）是合成词，由man构成的合成词表示各种职业或工作的人。
例如：businessman商人 doorman看门人 fireman消防员 fisherman渔夫. newspaperman新闻记者 postman邮递员 sportsman运动员 salesman售货员
Lesson 44
Grammar：语法：过去分词作宾语补足语，主要用在主+have/get/find/…+宾+过去分词的句型中have sth. done结构的三种不同含义：
⑴表示请别人（为自己做某事），强调主语的意志。
I have my tap repaired. (=I asked somebody to repair the tap.)我请人修好了水龙头。
⑵表示“遭遇某种（不幸的）事情”
She had her house damaged in the storm. (= Something bad had happened to her house.)
她的房屋在风暴中遭到了破坏。
I had my wallet stolen on the bus yesterday. （=My wallet was stolen on the bus yesterday.）
我的钱包昨天在公共汽车上被偷了。
⑶表示“使完成某事”，此事可以是别人完成的，也可以是自己参与完成的。
I have had all the branches cut up for firewood. (=All the branches have been cut up for firewood. )
所有树枝都已被砍作柴火了。（“我”可能砍了，也可能没砍。）
试比较：have sth done结构和have done sth.结构
I have repaired my watch. 我已修好了手表。（自己修）（have是助动词，本身无词义）
I have my watch repaired. 我请人把手表修好了。（别人修）（have是使动词，本身有词义）
三、同步测试
(一)单项填空
⒈He _____ the operation for long hours before he could take a rest.
A. had done B. did C. was doing D. had been doing
⒉He usually does well in maths. But this time, _____ he didn’t do so well.
A. for a reason B. for some reason
C. for reasons D. for the reason
⒊When he saw the sign “_____”, he had to turn back to go another way.
A. Go ahead B. Don’t pans C. Close D. Blocked
⒋She did better in the examination for she was _____ this time.
A. careful not to make mistakes
B. careful enough to make mistakes
C. careful to make mistakes
D. carefully not to make mistakes
⒌In the past years, we had millions of trees _____ to form the Green Wall.
A. plant B. planted C. planting D. being planted
⒍Last night he sat up late, _____ his speech ready.
A. got B. go get C. getting D. for getting
⒎The old mayor has retired and now a young man _______.
A. took the place B. takes the place of him
C. has taken place D. has taken his place
⒏He has all his money _____ while he was on a bus.
A. being stolen B. stolen
C. was stolen D. to be stolen
⒐There are so many people watching the game that several children were _______.
A. pushed B. pushed over
C. pushed forward D. pushed along
⒑Because they didn’t know the weather will change greatly, they are all _____ in the snowstorm.
A. caught B. took C. hold D. stopped
⒒Most of research work _____ up to now.
A. have been done B. has been done
C. has done D. have done
⒓The old man talked as if he ______ there before but in fact he hasn’t.
A. was B. had been C. were D. has been
⒔Lily as well as her sisters _____ to the Summer Palace several times.
A. have been B. has gone
C. has been D. have gone
⒕I found them really ______, for they sat there silently with their heads droping.
A. to be disappointed B. disappointing
C. disappointed D. disapoint
⒖Mr Zhang ______ that he feel well enough for light work.
A. demanded B. stuck to C. suggested D. insisted
⒗I think we should _____ more people to search the lost boy.
A. call at B. call out C. call in D. call off
⒘The manager asked his secretary that he wanted his letters ______ at once.
A. typing B. to type C. typed D. being typed
⒙His friends gave him some expensive presents but he didn’t ______ them.
A. take B. get C. receive D. expeet
⒚When they heard the news, their faces ______ disappointment.
A. got B. felt C. changed D. turned
⒛Better weather is _______ . We can plan for an outing.
A. in the way B. by the way
C. on the way D. this way
(二)阅读理解
⑴
Daniel Williams became a doctor in Chicago in 1882. After graduation, he taught at Noorth-West University’s medical school. He was asked by the president of the United States, Grover Cleverland, to go to Washington D.C. to head the Freeman’s Hospital. It was one of the few hospitals for blacks in the country.
He went back to Chicago to help set up Provident Hospital. Before it opened, Chicago’s black doctors could not practise patients. Doctor Williams also helped to set up a training school in Chicago for black nurses.
In 1893 he opcrated on a man who was dying from a wound in the heart. Such a wound had always meant death. Without X-ray he opened the man’s chest and saved his heart and the man remained alive for quite a long time.
⒈Danicl Williams graduated from ______.
A. North-West University B. Grover Cleverland University
C. Washington University D. None of the above
⒉According to the passage, he helped set up ______.
A. Freeman’s Hospital in Washington D.C.
B. Provident Hospital in Washington D.C.
C. a training school for black nurses
D. North-West University
⒊The hospital he helped found was greatly needed because ______.
A. there were no doctors for blacks at that time
B. blacks got poor treatments in other hospital
C. blacks doctors had to treat patients at home
D. blacks doctors needed a hospital in which to train nurses
⒋In the famous operation Dr. William ______.
A. mended the patient’s heart.
B. changed the patient’s heart
C. cut open that man’s chest
D. mended the man’s heart
⒌The writer of this passage told us that a wound in one’s heart was sure to die ______.
A. by the end of the nineteenth century
B. after1891
C. by the end of the eighteenth century
D. without X-ray
⑵
Verne was born in 1928, near Nantes. He went to Paris to study law when he was 18 years old because his father wanted him to. But he was more interested in writing. He was also full of fun and cared little about what people thought of him.
In Paris he made friends with Dumas, a famous writer. He and Dumas wrote a play. From then on, he paid little attention to the study of law. His father was so angry with him that he refused to send the young man any more money. He had to earn his living. Every morning at dawn (黎明) he was hard at work writing science books. Then, at ten o’clock he left his house and went to work.
His first boos was “Five Weeks in a Balloon”. Fifteen publishers refused to publish it. Verne was very angry and threw it into the fire. But his wife saved it and made him promise to try once more. The 16th publisher took it.
⒈Verne went to Paris because _______.
A. he was interested in writing then10
B. his father wanted him to be a writer
C. his father wanted him to go there
D. his father wanted him to be a lawyer
⒉However, Verne showed _________.
A. little interest in the study of law
B. little interest in what people thought of him
C. much interest in writing a play
D. much interest in what his father wanted
⒊His father was so angry because ______.
A. Verne wrote a play
B. Verne paid little attention to the study of law
C. Verne made friends with Dumas
D. Verne wanted to be a writer
⒋Early every morning. Verne was hard at work because ______.
A. he was used to that
B. his wife made him promise to do so
C. he had to make a living by himself
D. the publishers wanted him to do so
⒌Which of the following is true?
A. Verne worked at his science stories in his spare time.
B. Verne cared little about what his father thought of him.
四、参考答案
(一)单项填空
⒈D；⒉B；⒊D；⒋A；⒌B；⒍C；⒎D；⒏B；⒐B；
⒑A；⒒B；⒓B；⒔C；⒕C；⒖C；⒗C；⒘C；⒙A；⒚D；⒛C
(二)阅读理解
⑴DCDAA
⑵DABCA
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit1.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第一单元
关键词
内容
【教学目的和要求】：
1．单词和词组
二会：L1 Disneyland
L2 Walt Disney Chicago Kansas Milky Mouse cartoon cartoon-maker character Donald Duck studio
L3 Disney World Euro Disney View
L4 Magic the Magic Castle carriage
三会：L1 castle the sleeping Beauty castle ahead bear Bean country tower
L2 garage mouse unsuccessful
L3 operate beard imagine bring on
四会：L1 yard horse-drawn streetcar men's room sign the Tomorrow Land Building
L2 film-maker take along in the hope of well known lose heart day after day in this way snow white
L3 strict button beat
2．日常交际用语：
Excuse me . Can you tell me the way to …? Go straight till you see…
It's about …yards/meters down this street.
Excuse me .How can I get to…?
Go through gate and you'll find the entrance to …on the other side .
Excuse me please, where is the nearest men's room?
3．语法：
复习宾语从句的用法。
I considered (that) the park was good value for the money .
May I ask you when and where you were born ?
【重点与难点分析】
Lesson 1 第1课
1． Excuse me . Can you tell me the way to the sleeping Beauty Castle ?
劳驾，能告诉我去睡美人城堡的路吗？
向别人打听去某地怎么走时，先说Excuse me, 以表示礼貌，然后再问路。通常的问路方式有以下几种：
1)Can you tell me the way to the zoo ?
2 )please show me the way to zoo.
3 )Can you tell me which is the way to the zoo ?
4 )Excuse me ,where is the zoo?
5 )Can you tell me how to get to the zoo?
6 )Would you please direct me to the zoo?
2．Go through the gate and you'll find the entrance to Bear Country on the other side .
穿过大门进去，你就会在另一边找到熊国的入口了。
1）在祈使句+and +含有一般将来时的这一句型中，祈使句表示的是一种条件或假设，陈述句表示
的是一个结果。祈使句在作用上相当于if 从句，大多数表示建议或提出要求。所以，这个句型一般
可转换 为if 条件（假 设）状语从句+主句。
例：①Think carefully and you will find the answer.
=If you think carefully, you will find the answer .仔细考虑一下,你就会找到答案。
②Turn off the main road here and you will come to the castle.
=If you turn off the road ,you will come to the castle .在这儿拐入小路，你就会到达城堡。
2）这种句型还可以用连词or，或otherwise连接，相当于if not，意思是“否则的话”，
从反面来预测一个结果。
例：③ Hurry up ,or /otherwise you will be late.
=If you don't hurry up ,you'll be late .快点，否则你要迟到了。
④ Take a taxi ,or /otherwise you'll miss the train.
=if you don't take a taxi , you'll miss the train . 坐出租车，否则，你就会赶不上火车。
Lesson 2 第二课
1．He took along some of his pictures in the hope of getting a job there.
他随身带去自己的几幅画,希望能在那儿找到工作。
1）take along 意为“带领,携带”,有“一道带来”，“随身携带”的意思。
例如：She took her little sister along to the concert .她带了她妹妹一同去音乐会。
例如：①I went there in the hope of meeting some of my old friends.我到那儿去，希望能见到一 些老朋友。
②My father went to France in the hope that his health would improve .我父亲去法国以期 望他的健康能有所改善。
in the hope of /that有时也可以说成in hopes of /that .意为“希望有某种情况。
例如：①Mother was in hopes that the cake would be good to eat .母亲希望那块蛋糕很好吃。
②He did it in hope of a reward .他做了这件事，希望受到奖励。
2．We don't think there's anything of interest in your pictures .我们认为你的画并没有什么有趣的地方。
此句尽管形式上否定了主句的谓语动词，但在意思上却否定了后面的宾语从句。后面的宾语从句如具有否定意思，则习惯上要否定主句中的谓语动词，而不否定宾语从句中的谓语动词。例如，本句不能说成We think there isn't anything of interest in your pictures.类似的动词还有believe ，suppose 等等。
①I don't think she is at home at this time of day .我想她白天的这个时候不会在家。
（不说：I think she is not at home at this time of day.）
②I don't believe it will rain tomorrow .我认为明天不会下雨。
（不说：I believe it will not rain tomorrow.）
3．Disney did not lose heart .迪斯尼并没有灰心。
“lose heart”意为“灰心，丧失信心”。
例如：①He failed in the exam ,but he didn't lose heart .虽然他考试没及格，但他并不灰心。
②Don't lose heart . You'll be successful sooner or later . 别灰心，你迟早会成功的。
类似的短语还有： Lose one's head失去理智；惊慌失措。lose one's breath上气不接下气，喘不过气来。
例如：① When the fire broke out in the movies ,the people lost their heads and ran in all directions .
② He lost his breath in running .他跑得上气不接下气。
4．Day after day the mouse came back and was given more bread .老鼠一连几天都回来,而迪斯尼也天天给它吃面包。
day after day意为“一天又一天地，日复一日”，强调动作或情况的连续性。类似的词组还有，week after week每周地；month after month一月一月地；year after year年复一年地；generation after generation 一代一代地。
例如：① I have to do this work day after day .我不得不天天做这项工作。
②Some folk songs are passed on generation after generation .不些民歌是一代一代地传下来的。
5．at last he was pleased with one of his pictures of the mouse .最后，他对其中的一张画表示满意了。be pleased with对……感到满意；喜欢……
例如：① We are very pleased with our new house .,我们很喜欢我们的新房子。
②I'm very pleased with he has done .我对他所做的事情感到很满意。
⒍But the studios which he started are still busy today ,producing more and more interesting films .
但是他所创办的制片厂直到今天仍然很繁忙，否定睚在制作越来越多的有趣的影片。
1）句中的which he started是定语从句，修饰先行词studios 。
2）producing more and more interesting films是--ing短语作伴随状语，对上文所说的are still busy的情况作补充说明。
例如：①The children went into the forest , talking and laughing all the way .孩子们往森林走去，一路上又说又笑。
②The boy lay on the grass ,looking at the stars .这个男孩躺在草地上，望着天上的星星。
Lesson 3第三课
The parks are the cleanest parks that you can imagine .这些公园都是你可以想象得出的最干净的公园。
1）That you can imagine 是定语从句，修饰先行词parks。由于parks被形容词最高级所修饰，定语从句中的关系 代词用that，而不用which。如果关系代词代替先行词作从句的宾语，则常常可以省略。例如：
① This is the best film (that) I have ever seen .这是我所乍过的最好的一部电影。
② He is the tallest person (that) I ever know.他是我所认识的个子最高的人。
2）imagine意为“想象”、“设想”、“推测”，后接名词，动词-ing形式及从句作宾语，不能接不定式。
例如：① I can imagine the situation there .我可以想象那儿的情况。
②Can you imagine him becoming a doctor ?你能想象他成为一名医生了吗？
③ We could not imagine what would happen next .我们想象不出下一步会发生什么情况。
2．You can see as far as the coast .你可以一直看到海岸。
as far as意为“远到”“一直到”，例如：
①He walked as far as the village where I lived .他一直走到我住的那个村庄。
②We rode as far as the foot of the mountain .我们骑车一直骑到山脚下。
as far as = so far as意为“就……而论”，“据……”。例如：
①As/so fat as I can see ,it's likely to be cloudy tomorrow .据我看，明天象是阴天。
②As/so far as I know ,she is still wording as a teacher .据我所知，她仍在教书。
Lesson 4第4课
Grammar : Revision of the Object clause 语法：复习宾语从句。
宾语从句，实际上是直接引语改为间接引语的内容的一部分。因此间接引语的注意事项也就是宾语从句的注意事项。
宾语从句可要注意以下几点：
1.宾语从句要用陈述语序。
May I ask you where you were born ?但当疑问词本身是主语或主语的修饰语时，语序不变。
He asked me who ran fastest in my class .
He doesn't know which method they will use for the experiment .
2．要注意保持主从句时态一致。如果主句中谓语动词的时态是现在时或将来时，从句可以使用任何时态。如果主句中谓语动词的时态是一般过去时，从句须使用过去时态。
①I think he'll be back in a few days .
②Do you understand what the teacher said ?
③He asked me whose English book it was .
但是当引述内容为客观真理时，时态不变；当引述内容中有明确年份时，时态不变。
He said he was born in 1975.
The teacher told us that the light travels faster than sound .
3．要注意从句人称的变化。
He said ,“I was born in 1981 He said that he was born in 1981.
4．由that引导陈述句，if/whether引导一般疑问句，而用- wh ,或how引导特殊疑句。
He said to me ,“Are you a teacher ?” He asked me if I was a teacher .
He said that he would leave for Shanghai the next week .
Do you know who (whom)she is waiting for ?
【同步测试】
Ⅰ.单项选择
1．When he left for the sea ,he ___nothing but some food and water.
A. brought on B. took along C. took down D. brought up
2．Can you imagine ____a physicist ?
A. for him to become B. for him becoming C. him becoming D. him to become
3．Bring ____some water, please .I'm very thirsty .
A. along B. on C. away D. off
4．It wasn't long ____the rain stopped and the sun came out again .
A. since B. before C. until D. when
5．Keep on trying .Never____ I'm sure you'll be successful sooner or later .
A. lose hearts B. lose your heart C. lose heart D. lose your hearts
6．_____Chicago is a beautiful city to day .But ____ Chicago of the 1920s was a very dirty place .
A. The ; the B. / ; / C. A ; the D. / ; the
7．I thought hard _____ and finally had an idea .
A. one day after day B. day after another C. day after day D. day by day
8．Tom is pleased _____you have given him and _____you have told him .
A. what ;all what B. with what ; that C. that ;all that D. with what ; all that
9．Crusoe searched the woods carefully ,_____finding some food to keep himself alive .
A. in the hope of B. in this way C. in order to D. hoping
10．I don't think there's ____in what you've said .
A. interest of anything B. interesting anything C. anything interest D. anything of interest
11．She ____to me with this pen I had once presented her with .
A. was used to write B. used to writing C. used to write D. used to be writing
12．“I wonder if I could use your dictionary , “ ”Sure_____ ”
A. Go on B. Go ahead C. Go up D. Go a way
13．My mother wrote me a letter last week _____ hard .
A. encouraging me to study B. encouraging me studying C. to encourage me study D. to encourage me studying
14．I met her for the first time in the Summer Palace and ____ a few weeks we find it hard to get apart .
A. over B. for C. through D. on
15．Men workers in this company are not allowed to_____ beards .
A. get B. remain C. dress D. wear
16．The taxi stopped to ____a passenger .
A. pick up B. get on C. pick out D. get off
17．The club was ____ by a group of young people at the end of last year .
A. held B. put up C. started D. found
18．London ,the capital of Great Britain , lies ____ the Thames .
A. in B. at C. on D. to
19．We climbed higher up the mountain so that we could get a better _____
A. view B. idea C. point D. opinion
20．I have a good eyesight I can see ____ the distant is land in the sea .
A . as long as B . so far as C . as far as D . so long as
Ⅱ.【阅读理解】
(A)
Instructions :
Grown-ups : 2 tablespoonfuls
Children : according to age :
10-14 : tablespoonfuls
6-10 : 1 tablespoonful
3-6 : tablespoonfuls
Repeat above dosage (剂量) every two to three hours if needed until eight doses (服量)are taken .If relief (减轻，好转)does not occur within two days ,see a doctor .
SHAKE WELL BEFORE USING
1．According to the instructions ,what should you do before taking the medicine ?
A .See a doctor B . Repeat the instrucfions each time C . Mix it D . Add water to it
2．For whom would a dosage of one tablespoonful be suggested ?
A . A grown-up B . A child under ten C . A teenage D . A baby
3．What is the maximum (最大限量的) amount of medicine that should be taken by a grown-up in a four-hour period ?
A . Two doses B . Three doses C . Four doses D . Fire doses
4．How are children's dosages decided ?
A . By the weight of the child B . By the time of the day C . By seeing a doctor D . By the age of the child
5．Most likely this medicine is _____.
A .a pill (药剂) B . a lozenge (锭剂) C . an injection (针剂) D . a liquid
(B)
Indianapolis is the capital and largest city of Indiana , V . S . A . with a population of 744,000 , it is one of the largest cities in the world that cannot be reached by water .However ,Indianapolis is a city through which many railways , roads ,buses and planes pass .There are many factories which make trucks ,farm tools ,and electrical things .These factories cause little pollution for the city .Butler Vniversity , well-known for engineering , and the law medical schools of Indiana Vniversity are in the city centre .Nearby is the Indianapolis race course ,where the nation's most famous car race is held each year on May 30th .
If you visited Indianapolis you would be able to find your way around easily because most of the streets cross each other like a chessboard (棋盘).In the centre of the Circle ,stands the Soldiers' and Sailors' Monument , 100 metres high . Also in the centre there are many buildings made of the famous Indiana stone ,which makes them white in colour .
6．What is Indianapolis best known for ?
A . Its yearly motor race .
B . Its schools and libraries
C . Its unirersities and medical schools
D . Its soldiers' and Sailors' Monument
7．You car NOT travel to Indianapolis by .
A . boat B . train C . car D . bike
8．From the text ,what do we leam about the size of Indianapolis ?
A . It is the largest city in the V . S . A .
B . It has a population of over a million .
C . It has a population of under a million .
D . It is one of the largest cities in the world .
9．It is easy for a stranger to go about in the city because .
A . most of the buildings are in the centre of the city .
B . there are many different ways of travelling .
C . the buildings are very close to each other .
D . the city is planned in squares .
10．Many buildings in Indianapolis are white because .
A . they are painted white every year .
B . the Indianan people keep then clean .
C . they are made of a special stone .
D . there is little pollution form factories .
【参考答案】
Ⅰ.单项选择
1. B 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. D 7. D 8. D 9. A 10. D 11. C 12. B 13. A
14. A 15. D 16. A 17. C 18. C 19. A 20. C
Ⅱ.阅读理解
(A) 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. D
(B) 6. A 7. A 8. C 9. D 10. C
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit18.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第十八单元
关键词
内容
一、教学目的和要求：
1．单词和词组：
fly(n.) L.69四会
in order that shout at L.71
waiter lay the table by accident L.69三会
cigar announcement track truth book(v.) charge L.70
extremely determine stupid permit prison couple L.71
Hank Stram Tina Max carrige in common L.70二会
get in touch with absence Frankfort Bonn turn up on one’s own
rush hour brake cyclist rude L.71
2．复习日常交际用语（Unit13-Unit17）
3．语法：复习第十三单元至第十七单元的语法项目
a）名词从句 Noun Clause（as an attribute）
b）定语从句 Attributive clauses（by/in which）
c）过去分词 Past participle（as an attribute, adverbial）
d）省略句 Ellipsis
e）名词从句 Noun Clauses（as Appositive）
二、重点与难点
L.69
1．There are thousands of jokes in English which have a “play on words”.
在英语里，有数以千计的“双关语”的笑话。
句中的play on words意为“俏皮话”，“双关语”，“文字游戏”。即利用英语音异义或一词多义的现象构成含义诙谐的语义双关的词语。这一词组也可以作动词短语，作“说俏皮话”，“做文字游戏”解。本课中的小对话就是例子。
例如：Customer：What’s this?
Waiter：It’s bean soup.
Customer：I don’t want to know what it’s been; I want to know what it is now.
顾客说的最后一句俏皮话，就是通过“bean”和“been”这二个同音异义的词表现出来的。因为“It’s bean soup”和“It’s been soup”听起来是一样的，实际上前句的句意为“这是豆汤”，而后句的句意则为“这原来是汤”。
2．Customer：What’s wrong with these eggs?
Waiter：Don’t ask me. sir, I only lay the table.
这段对话的意思是顾客向服务员提意见问道：“这些鸡蛋怎么了？”（也许味道不对，也许是坏鸡蛋）。而服务员却回答说：“别问我这个，（我也不知道怎么回事），我只是摆了桌了”。这一笑话的关键词是动词lay，这是个多意词，lay eggs是（鸡、鸭）生蛋的意思，而lay the table是摆桌子准备用餐的意思。
另外在交际用语中，表示“……怎么了”有多种方法，例如：“你怎么了”可以有以下几种：
What has happened to you?
What’s the trouble with you?
What’s wrong with you?
3．…Quite by accident. 纯属偶然。
“by accident”意为“碰巧”，“偶然地”，“意外地”，“非有意的”，类似的词组还有by chance，相当于accidentaly，例如：
I met her quite by accident/chance. 我遇到她完全是偶然的。
He failed the exam by accident. 他考试没通过纯属偶然。
L.70
1．Hank Stram was on vocation travelling through Europe by train with his two children.
汉克斯特拉姆正在与他的两个孩子乘火车作穿越欧洲的旅行。
句中的on vocation意思是“正在度假”，另外还可以用on holiday表示“正在度假”。除此之外，on还可以构成一些习语，如：
on business出差 on purpose有意
Our manager is away on holiday this week. 我们的经理本周休假。
He’s gone to Canada on business. 他去加拿大出差了。
The family are on holiday in France. 这一家人在法国度假呢！
2．He bought a coffee and as the train was travelling fast and moving from side to side, he decided to drink it there and not to carry it back to his seat.
他买了份咖啡。由于火车跑得快，左右摇晃，因此他决定在餐车里喝掉它，而不带回到座位上去。
a）句中的get a coffee意为“拿/买一份咖啡”。coffee作为物质名词时是不可数名词，例如：Latin American countries export coffee. 拉丁美洲国家出口咖啡。
如果指“一份咖啡”或“一杯咖啡”时，常用a coffee或a cup of coffee来表示。
b）from side to side的意思是：“晃来晃去”。句中的from…to…还可以组成很多词组，例如：
from time to time有时 from morning to (till) night从早到晚
from beginning to end自始至终 from head to foot从头到脚
from bad to worse每况愈下
In order to buy her husband a birthday present, she went to from shop to shop.
为了给她的丈夫买生日礼物，她转了一家又一家商店。
3．They found that they had a / of in common and get on well.
他们发现他们有许多共同之处而且相处得也很好。
a）句中的in common作“（和……）有共同之处”，“共用”解，例如：
Real friends should have everything in common. 真正的朋友应该是共享一切。
The swimming pool is used in common by all the children in the neighborhood.
这个居民区所有的儿童共用这个游泳池。
另外，in common与介词with连用时，意思是“和……一样”。例如：
In common with many boys, he likes playing football. 和许多男孩子一样，他喜欢踢足球。
In common with you, he kept his mouth shut at the meeting yesterday.
他和你一样，在昨天的会上一音不发。
b）句中get on well为动词短语，作“（同……）相处得好”解，也可作“在……方面进展不错”解，与get along意思相近。例如：
How are you getting on with your classmates? 你和同学们相处得如何？
I’m getting on well in my new job. 我的工作情况进展不错。
We got on together like old friends. 我们相处得像与朋友一样。
4．Finally Hank and his friend gave each other their addresses and promised to get in touch again with each other when they both returned to the States.
最后，汉克和他的朋友互换了地址，并且保证回到美国后和对方联系。
句中的to get in touch with…是一个动作性动词词组，意思为“与……进行接触”，“和……取得联系”。如果表示状态，则用词组keep in touch with…，意思是“和……保持联系”。例如：
She was anxious to get in touch with you. 她渴望和你取得联系。
I’ve been trying to get in touch with you all afternoon. 我整个下午都在和你联系。
Have you kept in touch with him? 你仍和他保持联系吗？
For six months, the astronauts have kept in touch with the research centre on the earth by radio.
六个月来，宇航员们一直用无线电与地面上的研究中心保持联系。
*lose touch with…是“和……失去联系”的意思。例如：
I used to see him quite often but we have lost touch.
我以前常看见他，但现在我们相互失去了联系。
I don’t want to lose touch with you. 我不想和你失去联系。
5．He had gone through six carriges when he found he could go no further.
他走过了六节车厢，突然发现再也走不通了。
a）go through在句中的意思是“穿过”，这是一个十分活跃的动词短语，还可以作“审阅”，“检查”，“用完”，“经历（困难、痛苦等）”解。例如：
It’s quite dangerous to go through a forest alone. 一个人穿越森林是相当危险的。
They went through our luggages at the customs. 他们在海关检查了我们的行李。
Our tearchers are going through our papers in their office. 我们的老师正在办公室阅卷。
I went through all the money my parents gave me. 我花光了父母给我的钱。
My grandparents went through a lot during the war.
我的祖父母在战争期间经历了许多艰难痛苦。
b）注意when的用法。在此句中when意为“突然发生某事”，常常可译为“……正在……突然……”，这是when的固定句型及表达法，不可以用其它连词替代。例如：
I was just coming to see you when I ran into him. 我打算来看望你，突然又碰到他了。
I was about to leave when it began to rain. 我正准备离开突然下雨了。
c）句中的could go no further与could not go any further同义。例如：
I have visited the city no more since last summer.
I have not visited the city any more since last summer.
从去年夏天起，我再也没去过那个城市。
6．I’m going to see what Dad is up to. 我要去看看爸爸怎么了。
be up to是一个多义词组，需要根据上下文去理解。它可作“（打算）做……”，“（觉得）有条件做……”，“由（某人）决定……”解。例如：
They are very quiet. I wonder what they are up to there.
他们非常安静，真不知他们在那干什么呢。
Is she up to such an important job? 她能胜任如此重要的工作吗？
Whether he will take it or not is up to you. 他是否接受这个就看你的了。
It’s up to us to give them all the help we can. 应由我们来决定是否能尽我们所能地去帮助他们。
What have you been up to lately? 你近来在忙什么呢？
7．Two hours is a long time to take over a coffee. 两个小时端杯咖啡是够长的了。
a）复数名词作为一个整体看待时谓语动词用单数。例如：
Twenty dollars is too much for a child to spend a week.
一个星期花消20美元对小孩子来说多了点。
Three hours is not enough for them to complete the task.
对他们来说三个小时完成这项任务是不够的。
b）句中的take over作“拿过来”解，另外还可以作“接替（职务）”，“接管”解。例如：
I’ll take over his job while he is on holiday. 他度假时我将接替他的工作。
This large company has taken over many small ones. 这家大公司接管了许多小公司。
Was it in 1948 that the Government took over the railways in Britain?
大不列颠政府是在1948年接管铁路的吗？
8．She had gone through just a few carriages before she found herself at the front of the train.
她只走了几节车厢就发现自己已经来到列车的前部。
这里请注意句中连词before的译法，在此before作“（不多久）就……”解。例如：
He didn’t wait long before his father came back. 没等多久他爸爸就回来了。
It wasn’t long before he told us about the affair. 没多久他就把这事告诉了我们。
before在作连词用时，还可以作“……（之后）才……”解。例如：
It was a long time before I got to sleep again. 过了很长时间我才又入睡。
It was evening before we reached the little town. 天黑了我们才到达那小城。
It will be five years before we meet again. 五年以后我们才会再想见。
9．The message is this: you are to go to the hotel where rooms have already been booked for you.
他留下话，你们应去那家旅馆，房间也已经给你们定好了。
a）句中的be to do sth.常常表示“应该做某事”或“按计划将做某事”，这是表示将来时间的一种结构，用于第二人称时，常含有转达别人指示的意思。例如：
you’re to go to the teachers’ office after school. 放学后你要去老师办公室。
We are to wait for her at the school gate. 我们要在校门口等她。
They’re to begin their experiment next week. 他们计划下周开始他们的试验。
另外，这一结构用于第三人称时，通常表示命令或指示，例如：
“The room is to be locked”. The manager said. 经理说，“这个房间要上锁”。
She’s to be back before ten. 她必须在十点以前回来。
b）此句中的book一词作动词用，意思为“订（票，房间，座位等）”。例如：
He had booked two seats on the plane from New York to London.
他已经预定了二张由纽约飞往伦敦的机票。
I believe it’s terribly crowded, so you’d have to book seats now.
我认为一定十分拥挤，你最好现在就预定座位。
与book构成的短语有：
book down登记，记帐 book in签到 book up订（车票，住处等）
10．The hotel paid the taxi driver and put the charge on their hotel bill.
旅馆给出租汽车司机付了款，并将费用记在他们的旅馆帐单上。
句中的charge是个多义词，在这里作“费用”解，除此之外，还可以作动词用，作“收（费）”，“索（价）”，“控告”，“指责”等解。例如：
What is the charge for a room? 租住一个房间的费用是多少？
There is no charge for the exhibition. 这个展览不收费（免费）。
How much do you charge for a haircut? 理个发要多少钱？
We don’t charge anything for this? 我们对此不收费。
Please charge these to my account. 请把这些记在我的帐上。
He was charged with stealing. 他被指控犯了偷窃罪。
L.71
1．But the hardest part was the interview. 但是最难的一关是面试。
句中的interview是名词，作“接见”，“会见”解，另外还可以作及物动词用。例如：
In the morning, I had three interviews. 早上我有三次会。
He refused to give any interviews to newspaper reporters. 他拒绝一切新闻记者的采访。
The film star interviewed the journalist one by one. 这位影星会见一个又一个的记者。
The manager said it was time to interview the staff members in his company.
经理说是该接见公司职员的时候了。
2．A yellow car passed me and suddenly stopped, as there was another car coming in the other direction.
一辆黄色的小汽车从我身边开过并且突然停了下来，因为对面正好有一辆车开过来了。
在英语中，表示动作的方向多用介词to或toward(s)，但如果用名词direction时，则用介词in，构成in…direction，意为“朝……方向”。例如：
In which direction does the river run? 这条河流向何方？
She hurried away in the opposite direction. 她匆匆忙忙地朝相反的方向走去。
The ship was sailing in the direction of Dalian. 轮船朝大连方向驶去。
3．I had to brake hard and I hit another cyclist. 我只好急刹车，撞到了另一位骑车人。
brake一词既可以作名词用也可以作动词，在此是作动词用的。例如：
The driver braked hard as the child ran onto the road in front of him.
那孩子跑到汽车前面的路上，司机猛踩刹车。（作动词用）
His brakes failed on a steep hill. 他的车闸在陡峭的山路上失灵了。（作名词用）
4．I cycled as fast as I could and saw that the driver in the yellow car was waiting at the red light.
我以最快的速度骑过去，看到黄轿车里的司机正在红灯的地方等着。
The interview went well and I told the company about my experiences and answered their questions as honestly as I could.
面试进行得很顺利。我把我的经历告诉了公司，并且尽可能老老实实地回答了他们的问题。
在这两句中，均有由as…as引导的比较状语从句。“as+adv.+as+Subject+can/could”这一结构常可以用“as+adv.+as+possible”来代替，作“尽可能”，“尽量”解。例如：
I shall come to see you as often as I can (as often as possible)
我尽可能地经常过来看望你。
Please get them to finish it it as quick as possible. 请让他们尽快地完成这项工作。
5．I was still so angry I was determined to tell him what I thought of him.
我很生气，决心把我对他的看法告诉他。
a）此句是由so…(that)的句型引导出来表示结果的状语从句，其中的that省去了。口语常常可以省略。
b）(be) determine(d) to do sth.与make up one’s mind基本同义。例如：
He determined (was determined) to go there first. 他决定先去那儿。
I was determined not to follow his advice. 我下定决心不采纳他的建议。
Have they determined where the new school will be built?
他们决定在什么地方建新学校了吗？
6．I told him that he had knocked two people off their bicycles and had nearly caused a bad accident. 我告诉他他把两个人撞下了自行车，并且差一点儿造成一场事故。
a）此句中的knock off作“将……撞离……”解。例如：
He was so angry that he knocked all the books off the table.
他十分生气并将桌子上的书全都摔到了地上。
除此之外，knock off还作“停止工作”，“减（价）”，“扣掉”解。例如：
What time do you knock off? 你什么时候下班？
We have done enough for today. I think we’ll knock off.
我认为我们今天干得够多了，就到这儿吧。
I’ll knock you five pounds off if you buy two. 如果你买两个，我就给你减掉五英磅。
knock是一个比较活跃的动词，可以和许多介词、副词构成词组。如：
knock sb. down将某人打倒在地 knock at/on the door敲门 knock into sb.撞在某人身上
b）句中的cause作动词用，意为“引起”，“造成”。例如：
I hope you’ll forget all the unhappiness I’ve caused you.
希望你能忘记一切由我而引起的不愉快。
What caused his illness? 什么使他生病了？
The situation caused the serious concern to the Government.
当前的形势引起了政府的关注。
cause作名词用时，意为“起因”，“根源”，“理由（不可数）”。例如：
The cause of the fire was a cigarette end. 这场火灾的起因是烟头。
There is no cause for complaint. 没有什么可以抱怨的理由。
7．I seem to remember that the last time we met I did most of talking, so perhaps I should let you do the talking this time.
我似乎记得我们上次见面时，主要谈话的是我。因此这次也许该让你来讲话了。
句中的the last time引导出了一个状语从句。在英语中，一些名词词组可以充当连词，引导状语从句。例如：
The moment he spoke, we recognized his voice. 他一说话，我们就听出他的声音了。
Next time you come in, please close the door. 下次进来时请关上门。
Don’t look up new words each time you meet them. 不要一遇到生单词就查字典。
8．I was pleased that the manager had decided not to be angry with me for having been so rude. 我很高兴，经理决定不因我曾经粗暴无理而生我的气。
句中由for having been so rude引导的短语作状语，说明angry的原因。由于动作发生在谓语动词的动作之前，也就是说粗鲁的行为发生在经理之前，因此用完成形式having been来表示。例如：
He was sentenced to death for having killed a man.
他因为杀了人而被判了死刑。
He felt sorry for having wasted so much time.
他因过去浪费了太多的时间而感到遗憾。
She forgot having been taken abroad when she was a child.
她忘记当她还是个小孩子时曾去过国外。
三、同步测试
Ⅰ．选择最佳答案：
1．Here is my card. Let’s keep in .
A．relation B．touch C．connection D．friendship
2．I dislike the way he treats his students.
A．which B．by which C．／ D．on which
3．They are boys that they can’t do the work well.
A．so small B．so little C．such few D．such little
4．My father often asks how I at school with my classmates.
A．get on B．get down C．get off D．get up
5．-How long has this bookshop been in business?
- 1992.
A．After B．From C．Since D．In
6．-Why does Tod look so unhappy?
-He seems to .
A．to being scolded B．being scolded
C．to have scolded D．to have been scolded
7．It’s useless only about it.
A．talk B．talking C．talked D．to be talked
8．I still remember the many times he saved the wounded soldiers on the battle field.
A．where B．／ C．in which D．which
9．Who is it up whether to start the experiment or not?
A．to deciding B．to decide C．to to decide D．for to decide
10．When people talk about the cities of Japan, the first comes into mind is Tokyo.
A．of which B．that C．city D．one
11．The two words have something with each other.
A．in difference B．in ordinary C．in common D．in same
12．Can you lend me the book the other day?
A．about that you talked B．you talked about
C．which you talked D．that you talked
13．She hasn’t got enough to buy the computer.
A．that B．which C．for which D．with which
14．We think it important college students should master at least on foreign language.
A．that B．what C．whether D．what
15． I will accept the gift is none of your business.
A．What B．Whether C．If D．Which
16．He was born in Nanjing but studied in Beijing .
A．So did I B．So I did C．So was I D．So it is with me
17．What’s the for her anger? She’s usually not easy to get angry.
A．reason B．fact C．cause D．wrong
18．I was about to leave the telephone rang.
A．after B．while C．when D．before
19．The woman looks worried. She seems something.
A．having lost B．to be losing C．to have lost D．to lose
20．It was raining hard, caused the river to rise.
A．which B．as C．it D．that
Ⅱ．完型填空：
Two women came to Solomon with a hard problem.” This woman and I live in the same house. “explained one of them.” I gave 1 to a baby, and two days 2 , she bore a baby dead. But when I was 3 she put her dead child next to me and 4 my baby. As I got up and looked at the baby, I saw that it was not 5 .
6 this the other woman said, “No! The 7 child belongs to me.” The first woman answered, “No. The boy 8 is my son, not hers. “This was how the women 9 .
Solomon 10 for a sword, and, when it was 11 he said, “Cut the baby that is alive 12 half, and give each woman half of it.”
“No!” cried the first woman. “Please 13 put the child to death. Give it to her.” But the other woman said, “Don’t give it to 14 of us, go on and cut it.”
Finally Solomon spoke, “Don’t 15 the child! Give it to the first woman. She is the 16 mother.” Somomon knew this because the first woman loved the baby 17 much that she was ready to give it to the other woman. 18 this way the baby could be saved. When people heard how Solomon had 19 the problem they were glad to have such a 20 king.
1．A．food B．milk C．birth D．death
2．A．behind B．later C．before D．back
3．A．working B．sleeping C．dreaming D．lying
4．A．woke B．killed C．brought D．took
5．A．my B．her C．mine D．hers
6．A．At B．With C．On D．In
7．A．living B．alive C．lively D．lived
8．A．dying B．living C．death D．alive
9．A．quarrelled B．talked C．said D．fought
10．A．looked B．cared C．sent D．called
11．A．brought B．taken C．carried D．held
12．A．into B．in C．by D．onto
13．A．not B．not to C．won’t D．don’t
14．A．neither B．either C．both D．any
15．A．die B．beat C．murder D．kill
16．A．wrong B．real C．mistaken D．clever
17．A．too B．very C．that D．so
18．A．By B．Through C．In D．With
19．A．found B．grasped C．solved D．worked
20．A．wise B．brave C．cruel D．funny
Ⅲ．阅读理解：
（A）
Kleptomania is an illness of the mind that gives a person the desire to steal. Such a person is not really a thief. They are sick and cannot help themselves. All small children act naturally and as they grow up they normally learn to control their actions. People with kleptomania for certain medical reasons have failed to develop control over their desire to take things that do not belong to them. With medical help they many become normal citizens again. The things that a kleptomaniac steals are seldom of great value. They often give away what they have stolen or collect objects without using them.
1．What is the topic of the text?
A．Young thieves. B．An unusual illness.
C．Reasons for stealing. D．A normal child’s actions.
2．From the text we learn that small children .
A．have little control of themselves B．usually steal things but grow up honest
C．are usually kleptomaniacs D．like to give things away
3．Kleptomaniacs usually steal things that .
A．are valuable B．are unimportant
C．their friends like D．they themselves need
4．Which of the following words can best replace(替代) the word desire in the first sentence?
A．chance B．power C．right D．wish
（B）
Our neighbour asked my daughter what she put on her cat to make him smell so good, “Maybe it’s the perfume I use,” came the reply “The cat sleeps with his nose against my neck, so some of the scent must rub off on him.”
The next evening our neighbour was in a department store when she noticed a familiar fragrance(香味) in the air. Our neighbour liked shopping very much and always went to the same store. She asked the woman who had just walked by what perfume she was wearing. After learning the name, our neingbour said, over the heads of all in the crowded store. “It smells wonderful. My friend’s cat wears it.”
1．The cat smelled good because
A．the writer’s daughter put perfume on him B．the cat slept with the girl
C．the cat liked the smell of the perfume D．the cat wore perfume
2．Which of the following sentences does not keep to the topic?
A．Our neighbour asked my daughter what she put on her cat to make him smell so
good.
B．“It smells wonderful.”
C．She liked shopping very much and always went to the same store.
D．“My friend’s cat wears it.”
3．In the sentence “After learning the name,…” the world “name” refers to .
A．the lady’s name B．the name of the perfume
C．the name of the store D．the name of the cat
4．On hearing the neighbour’s words, the lady in the store would probably be .
A．happy B．angry C．worried D．proud
5．When the neighbour said, “It smells wonderful. My friend’s cat wears it.” she wanted to .
A．make fun of the lady B．make fun of the perfume
C．sound funny D．praise the perfume
Ⅳ．改错：
According to an old story, a farmer once found that 1．
a bag of corn had been stolen in his house. He went to 2．
the judge and told him his loss. The judge ordered that 3．
all the people of the farm must come before him. He 4．
took a number of sticks of equal long and gave one stick 5．
to every man. He then said, “Come here again tomorrow. I 6．
shall know who of you is the thief because the stick 7．
giving to the thief will be one inch longer than the 8．
others.” The next day a thief was found because he 9．
was afraid of being found out and cut an inch of his stick. 10．
参考答案：
Ⅰ．1-5 BCDAC 6-10 DBBCB 11-15 CBDAB 16-20 DCCCA
Ⅱ．1-5 CBBDC 6-10 AADAC 11-15 ABDBD 16─20 BDCCA
Ⅲ．（A）1-4 BABD （B）1-5 BCBBD
Ⅳ．1．√ 2．将in改为from 3．在him之后加about 4．去掉must
5．将long改为length 6．将every改为each 7．将who改为which
8．将giving改为given 9．将a改为the 10．将inch后的of改为off
高二英语第七单元重难点
重 点 攻 关
广东省深圳市宝安中学 赵国强 (518101)
1. You mean it looks strange! I’ll tell you something that does sound strange.你是说这看上去奇怪！我要告诉你听起来确实奇怪的事。
这两句话中分别用到了连系动词look（看上去是）和sound（听起来是）。类似的连系动词还有：smell（闻上去是）,feel（摸起来）, taste（尝起来）。使用这类连系动词时，不要用进行时和被动语态。如：
How sweet the music sounds!这音乐听上去多美！
The water feels cold.水摸起来很凉。
They taste like carrots.它们的味道像胡萝卜。
另外，第二句中的does用以强调，表示“确实”、“的确”等，以加强语气。如：
He did attend the meeting early then.他当时的确很早就到会了。
Do come on time.务必按时光临。
I do want to be sure. Do be silent!我确实想肯定。安静！
2. In the north, the winters are long and hard, with snow for six months of the year.北方，冬天漫长而严酷，一年有半年的积雪。
hard在此表示“严酷的”、“艰难的”。该词的另一些形容词词义需要弄清楚。如：
坚硬的adj.
Skate on hard enough ice.在足够硬的冰上溜冰。
The snow has frozen hard on the road.路上的雪已经冻得很硬了。
困难的，艰难的hard questions难题；a hard assignment.困难的任务
Is science harder than English?自然科学比英语难学吗?
It takes years of hard work to complete the project.完成这项工程需要多年的艰苦工作。
强有力的；剧烈的
a hard push奋力一推
The forecast says there’s going to be a hard frost tonight.天气预报说今夜有严重霜冻。
严厉的.，苛刻的；无情的
a hard master严师；a hard heart铁石心肠；a hard customer挑剔的顾客
Don\'t be too hard on the boy.不要对这个小男孩太苛刻了。
With表示“具有”、“伴随”等意思，中文翻译较为灵活。如：
Do you know the woman with a baby in her arms?你认识抱着娃娃的那位妇女吗？
China is a country with a long history.中国是一个历史悠久的国家。
本文曾发表于《学生双语报》高二版第10期
高二英语第十三单元的单词
Unit 13
△Albert Einstein 艾伯特爱因斯坦（1879－1955，生于德国的美籍物理学家）
communist n 共产主义者adj 共产主义者的
△Alexander Bell 亚历山大贝尔（1847－1922，美国发明家）
professor n 教授
ruler n 统治者
scientific adj 科学的
darkness n 黑暗
shy adj 害羞的
content adj 甘愿的；满意的
go on with 继续
lead to 导致；导向
discovery n 发现
the First World War 第一次世界大战
worldwide adj 世界范围的
△the Nobel Prize 诺贝尔奖
cheque n 支票
bookmark n 书签
right n 权利
human right 人权
peace n 和平
prove vt 证明
bent adj 弯的
work out 算出；解决
stick vi＆vt 粘住；钉住；坚持
stick to 坚持
respect vt 尊敬；尊重
leading adj 最主要的'；领导的
sadness n 悲哀
△Swiss adj 瑞士的；端士人的n 瑞土人
take sides（in） 站在...一边
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit16.doc
标题 The sea（海洋）
章节 第十六单元
关键词 高二英语第十六单元
内容
一、教法建议
【抛砖引玉】
本单元围绕海洋知识这一题材，让同学们通过阅读“The Sea”“Salt Lakes of the World”和“Life in the Oceans”来了解有关海洋及海洋生物的知识。
单元双基学习目标
Ⅰ. 词汇学习
四会单词和词组：sailor , do well , make up one’s mind , bathe , time ( vt .) , spring , beg , beg one’s pardon , captain , depth , merely , huge , construction
三会单词和词组：seaside , beach , dive , navy , drown , come up , vast , surface , solid , various , variety , float , the Dead Sea , partly , on average , pole , the South Pole , huge , at a time , occur , treasure , voyage , load , cycle , kg = kilogram(me) , the Atlantic = the Atlantic Ocean
Ⅱ. 交际英语
道歉和遗憾
一般来说，中国人喜欢反复强调自己的谦意，并喜欢用“非常抱歉”、“深表歉意”等表示程度倾向的语句，而英美人士则不同，对于因客观原因而造成的过失或差错，则不必主动工过分向对方表示歉意。如一定要向对方道歉，说声 sorry 即可，一般不用 very , terribly , truly 等表示程度的词。因为在美国，过分的道歉或自责反而显得不太诚恳，令人感到虚假或另有用心。
Some useful expressions：
1 . Sorry / Pardon / I'm sorry .
2 . I'm sorry for/about…
3 . I'm sorry to do sth . / I'm sorry to have done sth…
4 . Excuse me ( for… )
5 . be afraid that…
6 . What a pity/shame !
7 . It's a pity that…
8. That's all right . /It doesn't matter . /That's nothing .
9 . That's OK . /It's quite all right . /Never mind . /No trouble at all . / That's not your fault .
交际示范：
( A is late for a birthday party ) .
A : Come in , Mr Smith . Nice to see you .
B : Nice to see you too . I'm very sorry to be late . ( I'm sorry to have kept you waiting . )
A : It doesn't matter . We're glad you could come .
B : I didn't quite remember the number of your house , so it took me a long time to find your house .
A : I'm sorry that I didn't make myself clear .
B : Oh , that's nothing .
Ⅲ. 语法重点
学习省略句的用法。
【指点迷津】
单元重点词汇点拨
1. sailor水手；海员
He
科目 英语
年级 高二
文件 high2 unit12.doc
标题 Mainly Revision
章节 第十二单元
关键词 高二英语第十二单元
内容
一、教学目的和要求
1.单词和词组：
the other day goldfishL.45L四会
breath hold one's breath throw at L.46
fine (vi.) dish get away fall over L.47
recent exercise (vi) L.48
tank underwater bush L.45三会
lion Green Park Zoo attack frighten pale L.46
stare stare at carry off so as to attract
keeper struggle to one's feet speed up flow L.47
exact L.48
for one thing centimetre (cm) L.45二会
Cousins L.46
Jo run out of L.47
2.日常交际用语：
复习第七至十一单元出现过的日常交际用语。
3.语法：
复习第七至十一单元出现过的重点语法项目。
二、重点与难点
L.45
1. We need to find one about 30 centimeters (cm) by 30cm by 50cm .
我们需要找一个大约30公分宽、50公分长的水箱。
句中的30cm by 30cm by 50cm是体积的表示法，其中介词by表示”用……去乘“的意思，分别表示宽、高、长的长度。例如：
I want to buy a cage 1.5m by 1.5m by 3m.
我想买一个1.5米宽、1.5m高、3m长的笼子。
另外，句中的体积表示法也可以写出1.5m×1.5m×3m
2. Check the prices before you decide whether to buy one .
要看好价格，然后再决定买不买。
句中的whether to buy one是疑问词+不定式结构，作及物动词的宾语。在此”whether“作”是否“解，在这种结构中，不能用if代替（if to buy one是错误的）。例如：
We haven't decided whether to have a party .
我们还没决定是否举行一次聚会。
They didn't tell us when to paint the house .
他们没告诉我们什么时候粉刷房屋。
The worker showed us how to operate the machine .
这位工人告诉我们怎样操作这台机器。
3. For one thing they keep the water clean . Also they make the tank look much prettier .
一则它们（水下植物）可以使水保持清洁，再则他们可以便水箱看起来漂亮些。
a)句中的for one thing意思是”首先“，”一则“，用来举出理由，常用在For one thing…，for another…或For one thing…Also…这种结构中，意思为”一则……，再则……“或”首先……，其次……“。例如：
I can't stay here for long . For one thing , I've no time . For another , I've no money .
我不能在此逗留太久。首先，我没时间，其次，我没有钱。
I think she's fit for the job . For one thing , she dances . Also she's fond of singing .
我认为她适合这个工作。一则她会跳舞，再则她喜欢唱歌。
b)keep在句中是”使……保持“的意思，make是”使／让……“的意思，在这二个词的后面都跟复合宾语（宾语+宾语补足语）。在本句中，keep后面的复合宾语是”名词+形容词“（keep the water clean）；而make后的复合宾语是”名词+不带to的不定式“（make the tank look prettier）。例如：
Good food keeps you healthy .
好的食物能使你保持健康。
Please keep the room clean .
请保持室内清洁。
He made his parents happy .
他使他的父母高兴。（这是跟”名词+形容词“的复合宾语。）
They made the child cry .
他们把孩子给弄哭了。
L.46
1. The manager of the zoo said that the young lion , which was born in the zoo and is now six months old , would probably not attack people .
动物园的经理说，幼狮是在动物园出生的，只有六个月，很可能不会咬人。
a)这是一个主从复合句，其中的主句是”The manager of the zoo said“，其后跟了一个由that补导的宾语从句”that the young lion…would probably not attack people“，而在这一从句中，又插入了一个非限定性定语从句”which was born…six months old“，来修饰先行词the young lion .
b)句中的副词probably作”或许“，”可能“解，是most likely（很可能）的意思。所学过的类似的副词有：possibly , maybe , perhaps。另外还有形容词likely，也有很可能的意思。这些词都表示可能性，但在程度上和用法上稍有不同。perhaps作”或许“解，含有”也许如此“，”也许不如此“的意味，它和possibly的意味相似，但possibly通常与情态动词can , may , must等词连用。例如：
Perhaps it is true .／It may possibly be true .这也许是真的。
△Maybe也作”或许“解，同perhaps的意思接近，但比perhaps更为普通，它是英国英语，而maybe是美国英语。例如：
Perhaps it is true .／Maybe it is true .这或许是真的。
△probably也是”或许“、”可能“的意思，它比perhaps和possibly所表示的可能性大。例如：
They will perhaps succeed .／They may possibly succeed .
这二句语的意思是”他们或许会成功。“其中含有”不会成功“的意思较多。
但下面这个句中表达的意思则是含有”会成功“的意思较多。例如：
They will probably succeed .他们很可能会成功。
△而形容词likely也有”很可能的意思，大体上和probable同义，但比probable更为多用。在用法上他们也是有些不同的。likely后面常跟动词不定式式（be likely to do sth .）；而probable之后通常不跟不定式。例如：
He is likely to come .
他很可能会来。
在这外句子中，likely不可用probable代替。但在下面的句子中，probable却可以代替likely。例如：
It is likely that he'll come .／It is probable that he'll come .
2. Anyone who sees the lion is asked to telephone the zoo and the police .
无论谁看到这头狮子请打电话给动物园和警察。
句中的anyone who相当于whoever。anyone为代词，意思是“任何人”，“无论何人”。
例如：I didn't see anyone . 我没见到任何人。
Does anyone know the answer ? 有人知道答案吗？
请注意区别anyone与any one。anyone是代词，作“任何人”解；any one可起形容词的作用，也可起代词的作用，意思是“任何一个的”，“任何一个人（一件事）”。
另外any one后可接of短语，而anyone则不可以接of短语。例如：
I didn't ask anyone to help me with the work .
我没有请任何人帮忙。
I didn't ask any one of them to help me with the work .
我没有请他们中的任何一个人帮忙。
3. Mrs Cousins was making a lot of noise with the pans and did not hear anything unusual .
卡曾斯太太摆弄锅盘的响声很大，所以她没听见有什么特殊的动静。
句中的noise一词的意思是“声音”，尤指喧闹声，噪音。make a noise作“喧嚷”、“吵闹”、“发出噪音”解。例如：
Don't make so much noise .／Don't make such a loud noise . The baby is sleeping .
别这么吵闹，小婴儿正在睡觉。
我们学过表示“声音”的词还有：voice和sound，表示“声音”时，这三个词可以通用。例如：
I heard a voice／sound／noise .
我听到了一个声音。
但是它们分别又各有特定的含义。
△noise作“噪音”、“嘈杂声”、“吵闹声”，主要指不悦耳，不和谐的声音，它既可作可数名词，也可作不可数名词。例如：
Noise is another kind of pollution .
噪音是另外一种污染。
Very loud noise can make people ill , or even drive them mad .
很大的噪音可以使人得病，甚至使人发狂。
△voice多指人发出的声音，包括说话声，歌声或笑声，有时也用于引申的意义，作“意见”、“发言权”解。例如：
They boy shouted at the top of his voice .
那男孩高声呼叫。
I'm sorry I didn't recognize your voice .
对不起，我没听出来你的声音。
She has a sweet voice .
她的声音甜美。
I've no voice in the matter .
对于这件事，我无发言权。
△sound含义最广，指可以听到的任何声音。例如：
a weak sound微弱的声音，a strange sound奇怪的声音，the sound of music音乐之声。
I heard a strange sound outside .
我听到外面有一种奇怪的声音。
He went upstairs , without a sound .
他悄悄地上了楼。
4. She was just about to open the window and shouted at the dog to frighten it , when she stopped and stood quite still .
她正准备打开窗户，大声吓唬一下那条狗，这时她突然停住了，站着一动也不动。
a)句中的be about to do sth表示“即将做某事”，“马上就要做某事”，“正要做某事”。例如：
Don't go out now . we're about to have lunch .
现在不要出去，我们就要开饭了。
We were just about to leave when you telephoned .
我们正要离开时，你来电话了。
这里需要注意的是，about常与when搭配使用，这时其句子的特点是英语主从关系和汉语的主从关系恰好相反，比如上面的这个句子，英语中when you telephoned是时间状语从句，而汉语句中则是主句，而we were about to leave在英语中是主句，汉语中却成了从句。又如：
I was about to start when it began to rain .
我正要动身，就开始下雨了。
b)句中的when是连词，连接两个并列的分句，意思是“届时”，“在那时”，“……然后”，必要时在when的从句之前加逗号。例如：
I was about to go to bed last night , when I heard a cry for help .
昨晚我正要睡觉时，突然听到了呼救声。
My friend Jack came to see me , when I had dinner .
我的朋友杰克来看我，那时我正在吃晚饭。
c)句中的stood quite still短语中stood可以看作是系动词，后面跟的是形容词still作表语，意思是“静止的”，“不出声的”。to stand still相当于to remain unmoving and silent，用以说明句子中的主语所处于某种状态。类似的动词还有sit , lie，在这些词后也可以跟形容词作表语，对句子的主语进行描述。例如：
He stood still , watching the old people playing chess .
他站在那儿一动也不动，观看着老人们下棋。
He lay awake , thinking about changing his job .
他毫无睡意地躺着，考虑要换个工作。
She sat still , waiting for their decision .
她坐着不动，等候他们的决定。
5. At that very moment , the animal bent over the baby .
就在那一刹那，狮子俯身看着婴儿。
a)句中的very是形容词，用来加强语气，作“正好”，“就在”，“正是”解。例如
That's the very thing I'm after .
那正是我在追求的东西
This is the very man we have been talking about .
这个人正是我们在谈论的（那个）人。
b)动词bend意为“弯腰”，“曲身”，“屈服”，与over一起构成短评动词相当于turn over , lean to the ground，例如：
The tall man bent to listen to the little boy .
那位高个子男人弯下腰来听小男孩讲话。
I can't bend before them .
我不能向他们屈服。
He stopped and bent over to tie his shoes .
他停下来，弯腰系鞋带。
6. Mrs , Cousins held her breath , and her whole body went cold .
卡曾斯太太屏住呼吸，全身发冷。
a)句中的短语hold one's breath意思是“屏住呼吸”，“不出声”。例如：
How long can you hold your breath for ?
你能屏住呼吸多久？
The audience held their breath as the acrobat walked along the tightrope .
杂技演员走钢丝时，观从们都屏住了呼吸。
b)句中的went（go为原形）作系动词用，意思是“变得”（同become），cold是形容词，作表语，说明主语发生的变化。类似的系动词还有：fall , get , turn等。例如：
Eggs are easy to go bad in summer .
在夏天，鸡蛋容易变坏。
It's getting dark , let's stop working .
天快黑了，咱们停止工作吧。
The leaves of the trees turn green when spring comes .
当春天来临时，树叶就变绿了。
Before liberation , he often went hungry .
解放前，他经常挨饿。
Has anything gone wrong with the machine ?
机器出什么毛病了吗？
7. Worse still , it could even carry off the baby in its mouth .
更糟的是，狮子甚至可能把婴儿叼走。
句中的worse still是“更糟糕的是……”，同于what's worse .这是形容词词组构成的插入语，用来作补充说明，插入语后面通常用逗号同句子的其它成分分开。例如：
Lots of trees were blown down , Worse still (What's worse) , some people were killed or injured .
许多树木被风刮倒了，更糟糕的是，还死伤了一些人。
It was very cold last night . Worse still , it was snowing .
昨天晚上很冷，更糟的是，还下着雪。
8. There was not a moment to lose . ( = She had no time to waste .)
不能再耽误了。
There was not a moment to lose .
是一个固定的表达法，意思是“立即行动起来”，“一刻也不能耽误”。lose在这里作“耽搁”，“浪费时间”解。例如：
Hurry up , there's not a moment to lose .
快点，一刻也不能耽搁了。
She's very ill .Take her to the hospital and there's not a moment to lose .
她病得不轻，快送她去医院，一刻也不能耽误。
9. The lion looked at her as she swung the pork in her hand so as to attrack the lion's attention .
当她摇晃着手中的猪肉吸引狮子的注意力时，狮子看着她。
句中的attract是“吸引”，“引起注意”，“引起兴趣”的意思，（=draw）。例如：
The new film in going to attract a lot of visitors .
这部新影片会很受欢迎的。
The newly built museum began to attract a lot of visitors .
这座新建的博物馆吸引了不少参观者。
10. “Here ! Eat that !” she cried as she threw the leg of pork as far as she could onto the grass away from the table .
她一边尽可能地把猪腿扔到远离桌子的草地上，一边喊着，“喂，吃这个吧！”
a)句中的here，是感叹词，用来引起别人注意，译时比较灵活。例如：
Here , look at the beautiful picture !
喂，请看这张美丽的画片！
Here , don't walk so quickly .
喂，别走那么快。
Here , give me a hand .
喂，请帮帮我。
b) as far as she could后面省略了动词throw，这是一个状语从句，相当于as far as possible（尽可能远）。
这二个结构是这样的：
as + adj.／adv. + as + one can .
as + adj.／adv. + as possible .
例如：
I shall come to see you as often as I can／possible .
我会尽可能常来看你。
I'll try to work as hand as I can／possible .
我将尽可能地努力工作。
L.47
1. It's not safe to go outside until it is caught .
在抓住它之前，外出是不安全的。
a)在这个句子中，句首的it是形式主语，真正的主语是不定式短语to go outside，而第二个短语是人称代词，在这里代替的是the young lion。
b)在这里要注意的是句中not…until…的结构，其中的until相当于before的意思。这种结构的句子，翻译时可以译作“在……之前不……”，也可以译作“到……之后才……”。
如本课中的这句话还可以译作“抓住狮子之后，外出才是安全的。”请看下面的句子：
Don't leave until I come back .
在我回来之前不要离开。（我回来之后再离开。）
We won't do anything until we've thought it over .
在我们仔细考虑之前，我们不会做任何事情的。（在我们仔细考虑之后才会去做的。）
He didn't do his homework until his mother came home .
他妈妈回到家之后他才做功课。
2. Two keepers from the zoo came into the house and looked into the garden .
动物园的两位饲养员走进屋来，察看了一下花园里情况。
句中的动词短语look into的意思是“调查”，“研究”，“了解”的意思，但在本句中有“观察”，“调查”之意。例如：
We'll look into this matter together .
我们将一起调查这件事。
The police are looking into the records of all those involved in the crime .
警察在查阅所有被牵扯到这个案子里的人的档案。
其实look into的本意是“向里面看”。例如：
Father said to his son , “look into the box and tell me what you see” .
父亲对儿子说：“朝箱子里面，然后告诉我你看到了什么”。
3. Walking slowly across the grass he pointed the pipe at the lion and fired .
慢慢地穿过草地，他把枪筒对准狮子，紧接着他就开枪了。
a)句首的walking slowly across the grass是～ing短语作状语 ，表示伴随的动作。这种～ing短语作状语时，可以放在句首也可以放在句末。
b)句中的point…at…是“把……对准”，“指向”的意思。另外point to的意思是“指”“指着”的意思。例如：
She was pointing her fingers at him .
她把手指指着他。
“Point the gun at the target” , the officer ordered .
军官命令道“把枪对准靶子”。
The hands of the clock pointed to ten .
钟表的指针指着十点。
It's impolite to point your fingers at people .
用手指指人是不礼貌的。
4. The lion made a sudden angry noise and struggled to its feet .
狮子突然发出一声怒吼，挣扎着站了起来。
a)句中的make a noise是“发出响声”的意思，在noise一词之前可以加形容词或不定代词，如make a great noise（发出很大的响声），make a loud noise（发出闹声），make no noise（不发出声响）等。另外，noise一词可以是可数名词也可以是不可数名词。例如：
Don't make any noise . The hildren are sleeping .
别吵闹，孩子们正在睡觉呢。
What's that noise ?
那是什么响？
Who's making those strange noises ?
谁弄出的那种怪声？
b)句中的struggle to one's feet短语是“挣扎着站起来”的意思。动词struggle是“挣扎”，“奋力”，“作努力”，“斗争”的意思。例如：
The people were struggling to get out of the burning building .
人们奋力逃离出燃烧着的建筑物。
A bird was caught and was struggling to get free .
小鸟被捉并且奋力挣脱。
5. After a moment , it fell over and lay still .
不一会儿，它（狮子）就摔倒在地，一动不动了。
句中的fall over是“摔倒”的意思。例如：
A girl fell over and hit her head .
小女孩摔倒了，碰了头。
He fell over a rock and hurt himself .
他跌倒在石头上并且受了伤。
The hunter fired and the deer fell over dead .
猎人开枪了，鹿儿倒下死了。
三、同步测试
I选择最佳答案
1. She seems to the People's Park before .
A. be visiting B. have visited C. visit D. had visited
2. If you go to see the film , so I .
A. go B. am C. do D. will
3. He is not fit for the position . For one thing , he's not received enough education . For he doesn't work hard .
A. one other B. the second C. the other thing D. another
4. Worse , they lost their way in the forest .
A. still B. all C. also D. more
5. Please keep when I take the picture f you .
A. calm B. quietly C. still D. silently
6. Not asking of his friends to help , the boy did it by himself .
A. someone B. anyone C. anybody D. any one
7. I've written to my family, them about my school life here .
A. and tell B. to be told C. telling D. tell
8. “Please get yourselves for the coming exam” , the teacher said to the students.
A. to prepare B. prepared C. prepare D. preparing
9. Do you still remember the match we watched several months ago ?
A. for a time B. sometimes C. sometime D. at times
10.──When can you finish it ?
──It's hard to say . I'll finish it .
A. as fast as possible B. as soon as possible
C. as much as possible D. as possible as I can
11. It's never easy to succeed hard work .
A. after B. unless C. without D. with
12. All the problems raised at the meeting were solved .
A. one from the other B. one to another
C. one by one D. one after one
13. What kind of did you see in the zoo ?
A. the new animal B. a new animal C. an animal D. new animal
14. He saw a boy running out the big tree .
A. from behind B. from C. around D. of
15. He likes doing his homework with the radio on .
A. to turn B. turning C. turned D. turn
16. Anyone who breaks the law can't escape .
A. punishing B. being punished C. punished D. from punishing
17. The most interesting thing about this animal is it lives on .
A. how B. what C. which D. where
18. It was yesterday that I the news .
A. until , didn't know B. not until , knew
C. until , knew D. not since , knew
19. The doctor asked Charlie to breathe deeply , and .
A. did Charlie so B. Charlie so did
C. so Charlie did D. so did Charlie
20. The needle of a compass（指南针）always the south .
A. refers at B. points at C. points to D. refers to
II完形填空
The United States is full of cars . There are still many families 1 cars , but some families have two or more . However , cars are used for 2 joy . They are a necessary part of 3 .
Cars are used for 4 . They are driven to offices and factories by workers who have 5 to get to their jobs . When 6 are sent to different parts of the city , They have to drive in order to 7 their goods , Farmers have to drive into cities in order to buy things .
Sometimes small children 8 be driven to school , In some cities school buses are used only 9 children who live more than a mile 10 school . When children are too young to walk 11 far , their 12 take turns to drive them to school , One mother drives on Monday , taking her own children and the 13 as well . Another mother drives on Tuesday , another on Wednesday 14 , So people say they 15 a car pool . Men also form car pools-three or four of them take turns to drive to the place 16 they all work .
More car pools should be formed in order to put 17 cars on the road and to use less oil . Car-leaving place is a great problem , and 18 is the over-busy road
★ 高二作文英语
★ 高二作文英语作文
★ 英语高二作文
★ 作文高二英语
★ 英语作文高二
★ 初一单元英语作文
